Peak®200 Digital Control For Steam Turbines: Product Manual 35051 (Revision E, 4/2021)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 201

Released

Product Manual 35051


(Revision E, 4/2021)
Original Instructions

Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Installation and Operation Manual


Released

Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be
performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment.
Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions.
General
Precautions Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.

This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced.
To verify that you have the latest revision, check manual 26455, Customer
Publication Cross Reference and Revision Status & Distribution Restrictions, on
Revisions the publications page of the Woodward website:
www.woodward.com/publications

The latest version of most publications is available on the publications page. If


your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative
to get the latest copy.

Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified


mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or
property damage, including damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized
Proper Use modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within the meaning of
the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting
damage, and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.

If the cover of this publication states "Translation of the Original Instructions"


please note:
The original source of this publication may have been updated since this
Translated translation was made. Be sure to check manual 26455, Customer Publication
Publications Cross Reference and Revision Status & Distribution Restrictions, to verify whether
this translation is up to date. Out-of-date translations are marked with . Always
compare with the original for technical specifications and for proper and safe
installation and operation procedures.

Revisions— A bold, black line alongside the text identifies changes in this publication since the
last revision.

Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Woodward is
believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Woodward unless otherwise expressly
undertaken.
Manual 35051
Copyright © Woodward, Inc. 2016 - 2021
All Rights Reserved
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Contents

WARNINGS AND NOTICES ............................................................................................................... 7 


ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS...................................................................................... 9 
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................................... 10 
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 14 
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 14 
Controller Overview..................................................................................................................................... 15 
Functional Block Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 15 
Peak200 Keypad and Display ..................................................................................................................... 16 
Peak200 Functional Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 17 
Communications (To Plant Controls) .......................................................................................................... 21 
CHAPTER 2. HARDWARE SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................... 22 
Peak200 Description and Features............................................................................................................. 22 
Maintenance Info and Recommendations .................................................................................................. 23 
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ......................................................................................................... 24 
Bulkhead Version Mounting Information ..................................................................................................... 24 
Wiring Differences between Peak150 and Peak200 .................................................................................. 26 
Panel version Mounting information –......................................................................................................... 30 
Input Power Specification............................................................................................................................ 32 
Communications (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................................ 33 
Hardware - Terminal Blocks & Wiring ......................................................................................................... 38 
I/O Signal Specifications and Wiring ........................................................................................................... 40 
Troubleshooting Fault Codes ...................................................................................................................... 46 
Troubleshooting & Commissioning checks ................................................................................................. 47 
CHAPTER 3. CONTROL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 50 
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 50 
Front Panel View ......................................................................................................................................... 50 
Four Fixed Operational Action Buttons on Front Panel .............................................................................. 51 
User Login Levels ....................................................................................................................................... 52 
Navigation ................................................................................................................................................... 53 
Page Organization ...................................................................................................................................... 54 
Start Modes ................................................................................................................................................. 55 
Operating Mode (Setting Turbine Speed) ................................................................................................... 57 
Process/Cascade Control ........................................................................................................................... 58 
CHAPTER 4. CONFIGURATION PROCEDURES ................................................................................. 63 
Program Architecture .................................................................................................................................. 63 
Display Modes and User Levels ................................................................................................................. 63 
Mode Descriptions ...................................................................................................................................... 64 
User Level Descriptions .............................................................................................................................. 64 
Using Configure Menus............................................................................................................................... 66 
CHAPTER 5. OPERATING PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 84 
Software Architecture .................................................................................................................................. 84 
Front Panel Operation ................................................................................................................................. 85 
Power-Up Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 85 
Control Mode Architecture .......................................................................................................................... 87 
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 88 
Speed Control ............................................................................................................................................. 88 
Valve Demand ............................................................................................................................................. 89 
Controllers ................................................................................................................................................... 89 
Cascade Control ......................................................................................................................................... 90 
Analog Input ................................................................................................................................................ 91 
Contact Input Summary .............................................................................................................................. 91 
Woodward 1
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Analog Output Channel ............................................................................................................................... 92 
Relay Output Summary ............................................................................................................................... 92 
Actuator Driver Summary ............................................................................................................................ 93 
Overspeed Test Function (Speed Control Screen) ..................................................................................... 93 
Alarm Summary .......................................................................................................................................... 96 
Shutdown Summary .................................................................................................................................... 99 
Speed and Cascade Dynamics Adjustments ............................................................................................ 101 
Starting Procedures (Start Curve Screen) ................................................................................................ 105 
Critical Speed Band Avoidance ................................................................................................................ 107 
Speed Control ........................................................................................................................................... 107 
Speed Control Screen ............................................................................................................................... 108 
Shutdown and Alarm Function Summary ................................................................................................. 109 
Valve Ramp (Limiter) Control .................................................................................................................... 109 
Manual Valve Demand (Ramp) Control .................................................................................................... 110 
Zero Speed Signal Override...................................................................................................................... 110 
Automatic Speed Override ........................................................................................................................ 110 
Slow Roll Down Failsafe Override ............................................................................................................ 110 
Actuator Calibration/Stroking Procedure................................................................................................... 111 
CHAPTER 6. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................... 112 
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 112 
Modbus Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 112 
Basic Modbus Overview............................................................................................................................ 114 
Modbus Addresses ................................................................................................................................... 116 
CHAPTER 7. SERVICE MENUS ..................................................................................................... 122 
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 122 
Screen/Key Options Menu ........................................................................................................................ 122 
Speed Control Menu ................................................................................................................................. 123 
Valve Demand Menu................................................................................................................................. 124 
Real Time Clock Menu .............................................................................................................................. 125 
Cascade Control Menu ............................................................................................................................. 126 
Communications Menu ............................................................................................................................. 127 
MPU Override Menu ................................................................................................................................. 127 
Operation Log Menu ................................................................................................................................. 128 
CHAPTER 8. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................ 129 
General...................................................................................................................................................... 129 
User Level Password ................................................................................................................................ 129 
Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................ 129 
Troubleshooting Chart............................................................................................................................... 130 
Alarms / Shutdowns .................................................................................................................................. 134 
Wiring / Component Problems .................................................................................................................. 134 
Actuators / Control Adjustments ............................................................................................................... 134 
Other Operating Problems ........................................................................................................................ 135 
CHAPTER 9. PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE OPTIONS ............................................................ 136 
Product Support Options ........................................................................................................................... 136 
Product Service Options ........................................................................................................................... 136 
Returning Equipment for Repair ............................................................................................................... 137 
Replacement Parts.................................................................................................................................... 138 
Engineering Services ................................................................................................................................ 138 
Contacting Woodward’s Support Organization ......................................................................................... 138 
Technical Assistance ................................................................................................................................ 139 
APPENDIX A CONFIGURATION MODE WORKSHEETS .................................................................... 140 
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 140 
APPENDIX B SERVICE MODE WORKSHEETS ................................................................................ 150 
APPENDIX C AUTOMATIC SPEED PID DYNAMIC ANALYSIS ........................................................... 153 

Woodward 2
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


APPENDIX D SERVLINK-TO OPC SERVER (SOS) TOOL................................................................ 162 
SOS Communication Link ......................................................................................................................... 162 
Installing SOS ........................................................................................................................................... 162 
Connecting a PC/Laptop to the Control .................................................................................................... 163 
APPENDIX E. CONTROL ASSISTANT—SOFTWARE INTERFACE TOOL ............................................ 165 
Features of Control Assistant .................................................................................................................... 165 
Installing Control Assistant ........................................................................................................................ 165 
Using Control Assistant ............................................................................................................................. 167 
APPENDIX F. APPMANAGER SERVICE TOOL ................................................................................ 172 
File Management with App. Manager ....................................................................................................... 172 
Installing App Manager ............................................................................................................................. 172 
APPENDIX G. USING PEAK200 INTERNAL SIMULATION MODE ...................................................... 179 
APPENDIX H. STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST ............................................................ 182 
APPENDIX I. FEATURE PACK (FP) S/W ADD-ONS FOR PEAK200 .................................................. 184 
Updating the application software ............................................................................................................. 184 
Activating a Feature Pack ......................................................................................................................... 185 
Contents of Feature Pack 1 (License p/n: 8447-5004 – Release Aug/2017) ........................................... 186 
Adding LinkNet Distributed I/O .................................................................................................................. 188 
Datalogging ............................................................................................................................................... 188 
Multi-Lingual Support ................................................................................................................................ 191 
Event History Access ................................................................................................................................ 192 
Start Permissive Discrete Input ................................................................................................................. 193 
Start Permissive Analog Input ................................................................................................................... 194 
Hot Start .................................................................................................................................................... 194 
Rated Setpoint Start .................................................................................................................................. 195 
REVISION HISTORY ..................................................................................................................... 196 
DECLARATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 197 

The following are trademarks of Woodward, Inc.:


ProTech
Woodward

The following are trademarks of their respective companies:


Modbus (Schneider Automation Inc.)
Pentium (Intel Corporation)

Woodward 3
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Illustrations and Tables

Figure 1-1. Single Inlet Valve Steam Turbine ............................................................................................. 14 


Figure 1-2. System Overview ...................................................................................................................... 15 
Figure 1-3. Peak200 Keypad and Display .................................................................................................. 16 
Figure 1-4. LinkNet HT Distributed I/O Node .............................................................................................. 20 
Figure 2-1. Functional Block Diagram (Peak200 Control) .......................................................................... 22 
Figure 2-2. Peak200 Bulkhead unit............................................................................................................. 25 
Figure 2-3. Peak200 Bulkhead Mount Version Outline Drawing. ............................................................... 29 
Figure 2-4. Peak200 Front Panel Mount Unit ............................................................................................. 30 
Figure 2-5. Peak200 Front Panel Mount Version Outline Drawing. ............................................................ 31 
Figure 2-6. COM1 Example RS-485 Wiring ................................................................................................ 37 
Figure 2-7. Peak200 Back Cover Label – Bulkhead ................................................................................... 38 
Figure 2-8. Peak200 Back Cover Label – Front Panel Mount .................................................................... 39 
Figure 2-9. Terminal Block Connectors ...................................................................................................... 40 
Figure 2-10. Speed Sensor Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 41 
Figure 2-11. Analog Input – Self-Powered Block Diagram ......................................................................... 42 
Figure 2-12. Analog Input – Loop-Powered Block Diagram ....................................................................... 42 
Figure 2-13. Analog Output Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 43 
Figure 2-14. Actuator Output Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 44 
Figure 2-15. Discrete Input Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 45 
Figure 2-16. Relay Output Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 46 
Figure 3-1. Speed Relationships ................................................................................................................. 50 
Figure 3-2. Front Panel ............................................................................................................................... 50 
Figure 3-3. Mode Screen ............................................................................................................................ 52 
Figure 3-4. Language .................................................................................................................................. 52 
Figure 3-5. Navigation Cross ...................................................................................................................... 53 
Figure 3-6. Service Menu showing “Speed Control” IN-Focus ................................................................... 54 
Figure 3-7. Configuration Menu – Operation Mode (View only) ................................................................. 54 
Figure 3-8. Configuration Menu – Configuration Mode (Edit) ..................................................................... 55 
Figure 3-9. Startup Curve Screen ............................................................................................................... 56 
Figure 3-10. Cascade Functional Diagram ................................................................................................. 59 
Figure 4-1. Initial HOME Screen (unit not configured) ................................................................................ 65 
Figure 4-2. Configuration Menu – Configuration Mode (Edit) with Error .................................................... 67 
Figure 5-1. Software Architecture ............................................................................................................... 84 
Figure 5-2. Peak200 Keypad with “Splash Screen” .................................................................................... 85 
Figure 5-3. Boot-up to HOME screen (RemoteView) ................................................................................. 86 
Figure 5-4. Control Mode Architecture ........................................................................................................ 87 
Figure 5-5. Overview Screen ...................................................................................................................... 88 
Figure 5-6. Speed Control Screen .............................................................................................................. 88 
Figure 5-7. Valve Demand Screen .............................................................................................................. 89 
Figure 5-8. Controllers Screen .................................................................................................................... 89 
Figure 5-9. Cascade Control Screen .......................................................................................................... 90 
Figure 5-10. Analog Input Summary Screen............................................................................................... 91 
Figure 5-11. Contact Input Summary Screen ............................................................................................. 91 
Figure 5-12. Analog Output Channel Screen .............................................................................................. 92 
Figure 5-13. Relay Output Summary Screen .............................................................................................. 92 
Figure 5-14. Actuator Driver Summary Screen ........................................................................................... 93 
Figure 5-15. Overspeed Test Permissives.................................................................................................. 93 
Figure 5-16. Internal (Peak200) Overspeed Test ....................................................................................... 94 
Figure 5-17. External Overspeed Test ........................................................................................................ 95 
Figure 5-18. Alarm Summary Screen ......................................................................................................... 96 
Figure 5-19. Shutdown Summary Screen ................................................................................................. 100 
Figure 5-20. Speed Dynamics Adjustment Screen ................................................................................... 101 
Figure 5-21. Typical Response to Load Change ...................................................................................... 103 
Figure 5-22. HOME Menu showing “Startup Curve” IN-Focus ................................................................. 105 
Figure 6-1. Modbus Communication Connections .................................................................................... 112 
Figure 6-2. Typical RS-232 Communications ........................................................................................... 113 
Woodward 4
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Figure 6-3. Typical RS-485 Communications ........................................................................................... 113 
Figure 6-4. Basic Modbus Overview ......................................................................................................... 114 
Figure 6-5. Modbus Messages ................................................................................................................. 116 
Figure 7-1. Service Menu .......................................................................................................................... 122 
Figure 8-1. GAP-to-GUI communication problem ..................................................................................... 130 
Figure C-1. Speed PID Dynamic Optimizer .............................................................................................. 153 
Figure C-2. Speed vs Actuator Trends during analysis ............................................................................ 154 
Figure C-3. Speed PID Optimizer Configuration ....................................................................................... 155 
Figure D-1. SOS ........................................................................................................................................ 162 
Figure D-2. SOS Install Window ............................................................................................................... 163 
Figure D-3. SOS Server status dialog box ................................................................................................ 163 
Figure D-4. SOS – New Session box........................................................................................................ 164 
Figure D-5. SOS - Enter Peak200 TCP/IP address .................................................................................. 164 
Figure D-6. SOS – Active Links dialog box ............................................................................................... 164 
Figure E-1. Control Assistant License Agreement .................................................................................... 165 
Figure E-2. Control Assistant Install Window ............................................................................................ 166 
Figure E-3. Control Assistant Folder Selection ......................................................................................... 166 
Figure E-4. Control Assistant Install Complete ......................................................................................... 166 
Figure E-5. Install Restart Window ........................................................................................................... 167 
Figure E-6. Control Assistant Window ...................................................................................................... 167 
Figure E-7. Dialog for Servlink OPC connection ....................................................................................... 168 
Figure E-8. WinPanel Session .................................................................................................................. 168 
Figure E-9. Control Assistant – Retrieve Tunable Dialog box .................................................................. 169 
Figure E-10. Control Assistant – Send Tunable Dialog box ..................................................................... 170 
Figure E-11. Control Assistant – Speed Control Trend Script .................................................................. 171 
Figure E-12. Control Assistant – Create Trend Script File........................................................................ 171 
Figure F-1. App Manager Install Window.................................................................................................. 172 
Figure F-2. App Manager License Agreement Window ............................................................................ 173 
Figure F-3. App Manager Installation ........................................................................................................ 173 
Figure F-4. App Manager Install Complete ............................................................................................... 174 
Figure F-5. AppManager Window ............................................................................................................. 174 
Figure F-6. Dialog for App Manager Connection ...................................................................................... 175 
Figure F-7. App Manager Connected to a Control .................................................................................... 175 
Figure F-8. AppManager Control Info Window ......................................................................................... 176 
Figure F-9. AppManager Control (GAP) Application Panel ...................................................................... 176 
Figure F-10. AppManager GUI Application Panel .................................................................................... 177 
Figure F-11. Retrieving Files ..................................................................................................................... 177 
Figure G-1. HW Simulation Mode Access ................................................................................................ 179 
Figure I-1. HOME page ............................................................................................................................. 185 
Figure I-2: Site Info Page .......................................................................................................................... 186 
Figure I-3: Site Key Pop-up page .............................................................................................................. 186 
Figure I-4. Additional Control I/O .............................................................................................................. 188 
Figure I-5. Datalog Feature Screens......................................................................................................... 188 
Figure I-6. Selecting Datalog trend parameters ........................................................................................ 189 
Figure I-7. AppManager Setup for Automatic Collection of Datalog Files ................................................ 190 
Figure I-8. Language Icon on Mode Screen ............................................................................................. 191 
Figure I-9. Navigation to Event History page ............................................................................................ 192 
Figure I-10: Start Pop-up page with Start Permissive ............................................................................... 193 
Figure I-11: Menu selections for DI and Relay Output .............................................................................. 193 
Figure I-12: Menu selection for Analog Input Start Permissive................................................................. 194 
Figure I-13: Menu selection for Hot Start Multiplier .................................................................................. 194 
Figure I-14: Hot Start Enable and Active LED .......................................................................................... 195 

Woodward 5
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Table 1-1. Part Number Options ................................................................................................................. 14 


Table 1-2. Peak200 Analog Input Configuration Options ........................................................................... 18 
Table 1-3. Peak200 Discrete Input Configuration Options ......................................................................... 18 
Table 1-4. Peak200 Analog Output Configuration Options......................................................................... 19 
Table 1-5. Peak200 Discrete Output ‘State’ Configuration Options ........................................................... 19 
Table 1-6. Peak200 Discrete Output ‘Level Switch’ Configuration Options................................................ 20 
Table 1-7. Available (programmed) distributed I/O Nodes ......................................................................... 20 
Table 1-8. Menu Supported RTD Input Functions ...................................................................................... 21 
Table 2-1. Environmental Specifications..................................................................................................... 23 
Table 2-2. Peak200 and Peak150 Wiring Differences ................................................................................ 26 
Table 2-3. Input Power Connector Pinout ................................................................................................... 32 
Table 2-4. Ethernet Ports #1-2 (10/100) ..................................................................................................... 34 
Table 2-5. CAN Specifications .................................................................................................................... 35 
Table 2-6. CAN Connector Pinout .............................................................................................................. 35 
Table 2-7. CAN Cable Specifications .......................................................................................................... 35 
Table 2-8. COM1 Serial Port (RS-232/485) ................................................................................................ 36 
Table 2-9. Specifications (Speed) ............................................................................................................... 41 
Table 2-10. Specifications (AI) .................................................................................................................... 42 
Table 2-11. Specifications (AO) .................................................................................................................. 43 
Table 2-12. Specifications (ACT) ................................................................................................................ 44 
Table 2-13. Specifications (DI) .................................................................................................................... 45 
Table 2-14. Specifications (Relay Outputs) ................................................................................................ 46 
Table 2-15. CPU Fault LED Flash Codes ................................................................................................... 46 
Table 3-1. Cascade Control Status Messages ........................................................................................... 59 
Table 4-1. Mode Access by User Level ...................................................................................................... 64 
Table 4-2. Configuration Menus and Their Basic Functions ....................................................................... 67 
Table 4-3. Peak150 to Peak200 Configuration Parameter locations .......................................................... 68 
Table 4-4. Analog Input Options ................................................................................................................. 74 
Table 4-5. Analog Readout Options............................................................................................................ 76 
Table 4-6. Contact Input Options ................................................................................................................ 77 
Table 4-7. Options for Relays ff Used to Indicate State.............................................................................. 78 
Table 4-8. List of Options for Level Switch ................................................................................................. 78 
Table 4-9. LN Analog Input Function Options ............................................................................................. 80 
Table 4-10. LN RTD Input Function Options............................................................................................... 81 
Table 4-11. LN Discrete Contact Input Options .......................................................................................... 82 
Table 4-12. Options for Contact Outputs if Used to Indicate State ............................................................. 82 
Table 4-13. Options for Level Switch .......................................................................................................... 83 
Table 5-1. ALARM Messages ..................................................................................................................... 97 
Table 5-2. TRIPPED Messages ................................................................................................................ 100 
Table 6-1. Modbus Transmission Modes .................................................................................................. 114 
Table 6-2. Modbus Frame Definition......................................................................................................... 115 
Table 6-3. Modbus Function Codes .......................................................................................................... 115 
Table 6-4. Peak200 Exception Errors ....................................................................................................... 115 
Table 6-5. Available Holding Coils ............................................................................................................ 117 
Table 6-6. Available Input Coils ................................................................................................................ 118 
Table 6-7. Available Input Registers ......................................................................................................... 120 
Table 6-8. Available Holding Registers ..................................................................................................... 121 
Table 8-1. CPU LED Flash codes ............................................................................................................. 130 
Table G-1. Example Demo Configuration Settings ................................................................................... 180 
Table I-1. Additional Control Features ...................................................................................................... 187 

Woodward 6
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Warnings and Notices


Important Definitions
This is the safety alert symbol used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all
safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.

 DANGER - Indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
 WARNING - Indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
 CAUTION - Indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
 NOTICE - Indicates a hazard that could result in property damage only (including damage to the
control).
 IMPORTANT - Designates an operating tip or maintenance suggestion.

Ensure that personnel are fully trained on LOTO procedures prior to


attempting to replace or service the PEAK200 on a “live” running
Turbine. All safety protective systems (overspeed, over temperature,
Lockout/Tagout overpressure, etc.) must be in proper operational condition prior to
the start or operation of a running Turbine. Personnel should be
equipped with appropriate personal protective equipment to
minimize the potential for injury due to release of hot gases or fluids,
exposure to hot surfaces and/or moving parts, or any moving parts
that may be activated and are located in the area of control of the
PEAK200.

The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be


equipped with an overspeed shutdown device to protect against
runaway or damage to the prime mover with possible personal injury,
Overspeed / loss of life, or property damage.
Overtemperature / The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the
Overpressure prime mover control system. An overtemperature or overpressure
shutdown device may also be needed for safety, as appropriate.

The products described in this publication may present risks that


could lead to personal injury, loss of life, or property damage.
Always wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for
Personal Protective the job at hand. Equipment that should be considered includes but is
not limited to:
Equipment
 Eye Protection
 Hearing Protection
 Hard Hat
 Gloves
 Safety Boots
 Respirator
Always read the proper Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for any
working fluid(s) and comply with recommended safety equipment.

Be prepared to make an emergency shutdown when starting the


engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover, to protect against
runaway or overspeed with possible personal injury, loss of life, or
Start-up property damage.

Woodward 7
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

IOLOCK. When a CPU module fails, watchdog logic drives it into an


IOLOCK condition where all output circuits and signals are driven to
a known de-energized state as described below. The System MUST
IOLOCK be designed such that IOLOCK and power OFF states will result in a
SAFE condition of the controlled device.
• Discrete outputs / relay drivers will be non-active and de-
energized
• Analog and Actuator outputs will be non-active and de-energized
with zero voltage or zero current.
The IOLOCK state is asserted under various conditions including
• CPU module watchdog failures
• Power Up and Power Down conditions
• System reset and hardware/software initialization
• Entering configuration mode
NOTE: Additional watchdog details and any exceptions to these
failure states are specified in the related CPU or I/O section of the
manual.

An emergency switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building


installation that is in close proximity to the equipment and within easy
reach of the operator and that is clearly marked as the disconnecting
Emergency device for the equipment. The switch or circuit breaker shall not interrupt
Disconnecting the protective earth (PE) conductor.
Device

Only authorized personnel knowledgeable of the risks posed by live


electrical equipment should perform the calibration and checkout
procedure.
Risks of
Calibration and
Checkout

The power supply mains should be properly fused according to the


National Electrical Code. The recommended fuse is a European Type T
fuse.
Fuse Power
Supply Mains

Woodward 8
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Electrostatic Discharge Awareness


Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to these parts:
 Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to
Electrostatic the control turned off, contact a grounded surface and maintain
Precautions contact while handling the control).
 Avoid all plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam (except antistatic
versions) around printed circuit boards.
 Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit
board with your hands or with conductive devices.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper
handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual
82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.

Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.


1. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing made of synthetic
materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much as possible because these do not store
static electric charges as much as synthetics.
2. Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet unless absolutely necessary.
If you must remove the PCB from the control cabinet, follow these precautions:
 Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
 Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the components with conductive
devices or with your hands.
 When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic protective bag it comes in
until you are ready to install it. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet,
place it in the antistatic protective bag.

Woodward 9
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Regulatory Compliance
European Compliance for CE Marking:
These listings are limited only to those units bearing the CE Marking. Refer to DoC for applicability by
part number.

EMC Directive: Declared to Directive 2014/30/EU of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 26 February 2014 on the harmonization of the laws of the Member
States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

ATEX – Potentially Directive 2014/34/EU on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States
Explosive relating to equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially
Atmospheres: explosive atmospheres
Front Panel version: Zone 2, Category 3 G, Ex ic nA nC IIC T4 Gc X IP20
Bulkhead version: Zone 2, Category 3 G, Ex ic nA nC IIC T4 Gc X IP54

Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States
Directive: relating to the making available on the market of electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits

Other European and International Compliance:

RoHS Directive: Restriction of Hazardous Substances 2011/65/EU:


Woodward Turbomachinery Systems products are intended exclusively for
sale and use only as a part of Large-Scale Fixed Installations per the
meaning of Art.2.4(e) of directive 2011/65/EU. This fulfills the requirements
stated in Art.2.4(c) and as such the product is excluded from the scope of
RoHS2.

IECEx: Front Panel version and Bulkhead version:


Ex ic nA nC IIC T4 Gc
Certificate: IECEx CSA 17.0004
IEC 60079-0: 2011 – Explosive Atmospheres – Part 0
Equipment General Requirements
IEC 60079-11: 2011 – Explosive Atmospheres – Part 11
Equipment Protection by Intrinsic Safety “i”
IEC 60079-15: 2010 – Electrical Apparatus for Explosive
Gas Atmospheres; Part 15; Construction, Test and
Marking Type of protection “n”.

INMETRO Declared to Rule 179:2010


Brazil: NCC Certificate BRA-17-GE-0007
Ex ic nA nC IIC T4 Gc

North American Compliance:


These listings are limited only to those units bearing the CSA identification.

Units bearing only the CSA identification are restricted for use only in Ordinary Locations in North
America.

Units bearing the CSA identification in addition to the marking indicating Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C,
and D are acceptable for use in North American Hazardous Locations.

CSA: CSA Certified for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, & D, T4 at 65°C


Bulkhead version) 70 °C (Front Panel version) surrounding air temperature.
For use in Canada and the United States.
CSA Certificate 70101251

Woodward 10
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Peak200 Front Panel Mount Version is certified as a component for use in other equipment. The final
combination is subject to acceptance by the authority having jurisdiction or local inspection.

Special Conditions for Safe Use


A fixed wiring installation is required. Field wiring must be in accordance with North American Class I,
Division 2 or European Zone 2, Category 3 wiring methods as applicable, and in accordance with the Local
Inspection Authority having jurisdiction. On high voltage, AC and DC versions of the control the interior of
the enclosure shall not be accessible in normal operation without the use of a tool.

A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation that is in close proximity to the
equipment and within easy reach of the operator. The switch or circuit breaker shall be clearly marked as
the disconnecting device for the equipment. The switch or circuit breaker shall not interrupt the Protective
Earth (PE) conductor.

Hazardous Locations
The Peak200 Digital Control (Front Panel version) shall not be installed in areas exceeding Pollution
Degree 2 as defined in IEC 60664-1.

Wiring must be in accordance with Zone 2 wiring methods and in accordance with the authority having
final jurisdiction.

Field wiring must be suitable for the following temperatures:


 Power Input rated minimum of +95˚C.
 All remaining connections; +10˚C above highest ambient.

Protective Earth Grounding of the Peak200 Digital Control is required to be connected to the
PE terminal.

The Real Time Clock Battery located on the CPU board is not to be recharged and is not user
replaceable. Contact a Woodward Authorized Service Center if a replacement service is needed.

The CSA and/or CE marked High Voltage and Low Voltage ATEX Peak200 Digital Control is suitable for
use in Class I, Div 2, Gas Groups A, B, C and D & European Zone 2, Group IIC environments.

For Zone 2 installations, the Peak200 must be installed in an area or enclosure providing adequate
protection against high impact (7 Joules). The control is rated for 2 Joules impact.

For ATEX/IECEx the Peak200 Digital Control (Front Panel version) shall be installed in an enclosure that
is coded Ex nA or Ex e, providing a minimum IP54 ingress protection in accordance with IEC 60079-15.
The installer shall ensure that the maximum surrounding air temperature does not exceed the rated
temperature of +70 °C at the final installation location.

For Zone 2 installations, transient protection for the Peak200 Digital Control is to be provided externally
by the end user at the supply terminals of the control. The transient protection device is to be set at a
level not exceeding 140% of the peak rated voltage (36Vdc for Low Voltage or 264 Vac for High Voltage
Peak200 model).

The risk of electrostatic discharge is reduced by permanent installation of the Peak200 (Bulkhead
version), proper connection of the equipment ground lugs, and care when cleaning. This device must not
be cleaned or wiped off/against unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.

For ATEX/IECEx installation compliance, the input voltage shall be


limited to 36 Vdc for Low Voltage or 264 Vac for High Voltage
Peak200 model. When an external power supply is selected to supply
Explosion Hazard the Control, it shall be ATEX/IECEx approved for Zone 2 Group IIC,
Category 3G Applications.

Woodward 11
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Due to the Hazardous Location Listings associated with this product,


proper wire type and wiring practices are critical to the operation.

Explosion Hazard

ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENT— ATEX/IECEx Zone 2, Category 3G


applications require the final installation location provide a minimum
IP-54 ingress protection enclosure against dust and water per IEC
Explosion Hazard 60529. The enclosure must be coded Ex nA or Ex e.

Do not remove covers or connect/disconnect electrical connectors


unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non-
hazardous.
Explosion Hazard

Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division


2, or Zone 2.

Explosion Hazard

The external ground lugs shown on the installation drawing must be


properly connected to ensure equipotential bonding. This will reduce
the risk of electrostatic discharge in an explosive atmosphere.
Explosion Hazard Cleaning by hand or water spray must be performed while the area is
known to be non-hazardous to prevent an electrostatic discharge in
an explosive atmosphere.

MOUNTING
The control must be mounted in a vertical position. The installer shall
ensure the maximum surrounding air temperature of the control does
Explosion Hazard not exceed +65 °C (Bulkhead version) or +70˚C (Front Panel version) at
the final location.

Class I, Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D and Zone 2, Group IIC applications


require the input voltage to the relay contacts not exceed 32Vac rms
or 32Vdc.
Explosion Hazard

Ne pas enlever les couvercles, ni raccorder / débrancher les


prises électriques, sans vous en assurez auparavant que le
système a bien été mis hors tension; ou que vous situez
Risque d'explosion bien dans une zone non explosive.

Woodward 12
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

La substitution de composants peut rendre ce matériel


inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe I, Division 2
et/ou Zone 2.
Risque d'explosion

Ne pas utiliser les bornes d’essai du block d’alimentation ou


des cartes de commande à moins de se trouver dans un
emplacement non dangereux.
Risque d'explosion

Safety Symbols
Direct Current
Alternating Current
Both Alternating and Direct Current

Caution, risk of electrical shock

Caution, refer to accompanying documents

Protective conductor terminal

Frame or chassis terminal

Woodward 13
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 1.
General Information

Introduction
This manual describes the Woodward Peak200 digital control for single valve steam turbines used for
pump and mechanical drive applications. The scope of this manual is to provide information on
programming, operation and troubleshooting of the Peak200 control.

Figure 1-1. Single Inlet Valve Steam Turbine

Table 1-1. Part Number Options

Part Number Mounting Power


8200-1500 Bulkhead LVDC (18–36 Vdc) Standard Compliance
8200-1501 Bulkhead AC/DC (88–264 Vac/90–150 Vdc) Standard Compliance
8200-1502 Bulkhead LVDC (18–36 Vdc) ATEX Compliance
8200-1506 Bulkhead LVDC (18–36 Vdc) Inmetro Compliance
8200-1508 Bulkhead AC/DC (88–264 Vac/90–150 Vdc) NA C1D2 Compliance
8200-1503 Door or Panel LVDC (18–36 Vdc) Standard Compliance
8200-1504 Door or Panel AC/DC (88–264 Vac/90–150 Vdc) Standard Compliance
8200-1505 Door or Panel LVDC (18–36 Vdc) ATEX Compliance
8200-1507 Door or Panel LVDC (18–36 Vdc) Inmetro Compliance
8200-1509 Door or Panel AC/DC (88–264 Vac/90–150 Vdc) NA C1D2 Compliance

EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not open the Peak200 control box when a


hazardous atmosphere is present. Wiring connections, which could
cause sparks, are exposed inside the cabinet.

Do NOT attempt to operate the turbine until properly configuring the


Peak200 control. Doing so could cause equipment damage. As
shipped from the factory the unit will not run a turbine.

Woodward 14
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Controller Overview
The Peak200 is a field configurable control which allows a single design to be used in many different
control applications and reduces both cost and delivery time. It uses a built in graphical user interface
(GUI) with menu driven screens to instruct site engineers on configuring the control to a specific
application. This control’s intended use is on mechanical drive or pump control applications (generator
drive units should use the Woodward 505 product). The Peak200 can be configured to operate as a
stand-alone turbine control unit or can be interfaced via hardwire signals and/or a Modbus communication
link to be operated from a plant’s Distributed Control System.

The Peak200 control has four demand signals that can affect the controlled operation of the steam
turbine: The Speed PID Controller, the HP Valve Limiter, the Manual HP valve demand (service only),
and the Trip/Shutdown Command. The four demand signals connect to a Lowest Signal Select (LSS) bus
that passes the lowest value to the output, which connects to the valve demand.

The Cascade PID controller is an additional (optional) control loop that allows the user to control some
other process in their plant. The output of this control does not go to the LSS directly; instead, it controls
the setpoint of the speed controller. In Woodward terminology, we call this a cascade control loop
because its output drives another controller’s setpoint rather than directly affecting the valve demand with
its own output.

Functional Block Diagrams


A system overview in block form is in Figure 1-2 below.

Figure 1-2. System Overview

Woodward 15
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Peak200 Keypad and Display


Graphical Display Key Inputs
The front panel display provides the user with multiple levels of access for configuring, calibrating, tuning,
operating, and monitoring the turbine operation. No additional control panels are required to operate the
turbine, with every turbine control function performed from the Peak200’s front panel.

Figure 1-3. Peak200 Keypad and Display

A description of each key’s function follows.

Hard Key Commands

NUMERIC KEYPAD
These are available for entering numeric values or text strings directly into the control when selecting a
configurable or programmable edit field. The bottom row of keys has some special features.

Backspace and Delete Key (used when entering text)

In text mode, this functions as a Shift key. When making analog adjustments with the ADJUST
key – pressing this key at the same time as the ADJUST will invoke a ‘Fast’ rate of adjustment

Brightness key – hold this down and then use the ADJUST key to increase/decrease the screen
brightness

TRIP KEY
This will Trip the Turbine and remove all current from the Actuator outputs (zero current).

LED
Four LEDs located on the left side – a Summary Trip, Summary Alarm, IO Lock, and CPU Health. The
GAP program controls the two Summary LEDs and relate to the status of the control. The IOLOCK and
CPU LED’s relate to the H/W status.

VIEW buttons will jump to the Trip or Alarm Summary screen to show these events in sequence with time
stamp.
Woodward 16
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

MODE button will jump to a Login screen that allows the user to view current permissions and allow
access to changing the user login level

ESC Key – this will always step the user ‘back’ one page from the current page displayed

HOME Key
Brings the user to the Home menu for Run, Service, or Configure. Pressing the Home Key a second time
will return to the Run (Operate) Menu Home Screen

NAVIGATION CROSS KEYS


These are the primary keys for navigating from page to page, or for navigation of the FOCUS on any
page.

Soft Key Commands – Dependent on the screen currently in view – the user must use the navigation
cross keys to move the “Focus” to the desired component

GREEN KEYS
Generally perform Operational Actions – such as Enabling, Disabling, Starting, Stopping, Tuning, or
Adjusting values

MAROON KEYS
Generally perform Navigational actions that escort the user through the screen menus

BLACK KEYS
Are soft-function keys that relate to the display indication displayed immediately above. They can be
navigational or operational. These items do not require “Focus”; they are always available on that
particular screen.

The Peak200 has a detailed Tutorial that is always accessible through the
Service Menu. It provides ‘On-Screen’ help on topics such as Navigation,
User Levels, Operating Modes, how to adjust parameters, and more. The
Screen Tutorial User should familiarize themselves with these screens

Peak200 Functional Inputs and Outputs


This section gives a quick overview reference of the functional I/O signals, which the Peak200 application
software supports.

Magnetic Pickups
The Magnetic Pickups (MPUs) generate a speed signal used to provide speed feedback to the Peak200.
The MPUs do this by generating voltage pulses as the gear teeth pass through the MPU’s magnetic field.
The Peak200 counts the number of pulses per second from the MPUs (frequency in HZ) and converts
this frequency to turbine RPM.

Two MPUs (MPU 1 and MPU 2) may be used to provide redundant speed inputs, that is where one can
fail and the remaining MPU keeps the turbine operating. The Peak200 determines which MPU is
outputting the highest frequency and uses that frequency as the speed feedback to control the turbine.

When only one MPU is used, the user can disable the second MPU input.

The Peak200 converts the MPUs input frequency to RPMs by using the number of teeth programmed in
the SPEED CONFIGURATION menu for TEETH SEEN BY MPU = xxxxx (Teeth) in the following formula:

RPM = (Hz x 60) / Teeth

Woodward 17
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


When the speed of the main turbine shaft is different from the speed of the MPU gear shaft, the value for
MPU GEAR RATIO = x is programmed for the correct ratio. The above equation is multiplied by the
RATIO so that the RPM seen by the Peak200 will be turbine RPM and not MPU gear shaft RPM. Gear
Ratio equals the gear speed divided by the turbine speed.

RPM = ((Hz x 60) / (Teeth x Gear Ratio)

The physical MPU should be gapped so that a signal of at least 1.0 VRMS is seen at the control, when
the speed is at the failed speed level (amplitude will increase as the speed increases). The Peak200
control will show the voltage of this signal on the speed signal.

Analog Input
The Peak200 has four analog inputs and the option for the customer to add a LinkNet distributed AI/AO
module that would provide eight additional channels. All of these channels are configurable by the user.
The following table is the list of analog input functions that the menus support, which assign functions to
specific channels.

Table 1-2. Peak200 Analog Input Configuration Options

Remote Speed Setpoint Bearing Temperature #1


Process/Cascade Input Bearing Temperature #2
Remote Cascade Setpoint Bearing Temperature #3
Vibration Input #1 Bearing Temperature #4
Vibration Input #2 Signal Monitoring #1
Vibration Input #3 Signal Monitoring #2
Vibration Input #4 Signal Monitoring #3
HP Valve Feedback Position

Contact Inputs
The Peak200 has eight discrete contact inputs and the option for the customer to add a LinkNet
distributed DI module that would provide 16 additional channels. Channel 3 is dedicated to “External Trip
1” (same as the previous Peak 150 product), but all other channels are configurable by the user.
The following table is the list of discrete contact input functions that the menus support, which assign
functions to specific channels.

Table 1-3. Peak200 Discrete Input Configuration Options

Lower Speed Command External Trip 2


Raise Speed Command External Trip 3
External Trip 1 External Trip 4
Start/External Run External Trip 5
Reset Command External Alarm 1
Idle/MinGov Command External Alarm 2
Remote Speed Setpoint Enable External Alarm 3
Select On-Line Dynamics Valve Limiter Open
Overspeed Test Valve Limiter Close
Raise Process/Casc Setpoint Clock Sync Pulse
Lower Process/Casc Setpoint Speed/Casc Raise Command
Process/Casc Control Enable Speed/Casc Lower Command
Rmt Cascade Setpoint Enable

Select these discrete inputs by connecting them to a 5–28 Vdc supply.

For an External Trip input, power is removed from the TRIP input. Therefore, before starting the turbine,
close the external TRIP contact with a switch, a relay contact, or a jumper. The External Trips two, three,
four, and five are also defaulted to be ‘active low’ so that a loss of signal initiates a Trip.

Woodward 18
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


If the IDLE / MIN GOV input is configured for use, it is opened for IDLE speed and closed for MIN
GOVERNOR Speed.

All other inputs close for the listed function.

Actuator Driver
The Actuator Driver output is dedicated to being the demand output for the main inlet steam valve (HP
Valve) and supports two current ranges:
 0-20 mA range
 0-200 mA range

Analog Outputs
The Peak200 has three analog output and the option for the customer to add a LinkNet distributed AI/AO
module that would provide two additional channels. All of these channels are configurable by the user.
The following table is the list of analog output functions that the menus support, which assign functions to
specific channels.

Table 1-4. Peak200 Analog Output Configuration Options

Not Used HP Valve Demand


Actual Speed Signal Monitoring #1
Speed Setpoint Signal Monitoring #2
Remote Speed Setpoint Signal Monitoring #3
Process/Cascade Input
Process/Cascade Setpoint
Remote Cascade Setpoint
Valve Limiter Setpoint

Relays
The Peak200 has four discrete outputs or relays. Default settings dedicate the first channel as the Trip
Relay and the second relay as an Alarm Summary relay, but can be re-assigned if needed.
 Relay #1 - TRIP RELAY (Configurable to either energize or de-energize for trip)
 Relay #2 - ALARM RELAY (Normally energized—de-energizes for alarm)

The Peak200 also has the option for the customer to add a LinkNet distributed DO module that would
provide 16 additional channels.

All relays (other than channel 1) can be configured for the following functions or indications.

Table 1-5. Peak200 Discrete Output ‘State’ Configuration Options

Not Used Process/Cascade Control Enabled


Shutdown Summary Process/Cascade PID in Control
Alarm Summary Process/Cascade PID Active
Reset Pulse (2 sec) Remote Cascade Setpoint Enabled
Speed PID in Control Remote Cascade Setpoint Active
Remote Speed Setpoint Enabled Underspeed Switch
Remote Speed Setpoint Active HP Valve Limiter in Control
Overspeed Trip On-Line Speed PID Dynamics
Overspeed Test Enabled Repeat of Trip Relay
Unit Pulse Indication (2 sec)

Woodward 19
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 1-6. Peak200 Discrete Output ‘Level Switch’ Configuration Options

Not Used AI Signal Monitoring #1


Actual Speed AI Signal Monitoring #2
Speed Setpoint AI Signal Monitoring #3
Process/Cascade Input
Process/Cascade Setpoint
HP Valve Demand

The four contact outputs on the Peak200 are Form C relays with both normally open and normally closed
contacts available. The Linknet nodes provide only contact outputs, so interposing relays may be
required.
Note: Refer to chapter 2 for specifications and ratings of the hardware.

Optional Distributed I/O


Additional I/O has been pre-programmed using Woodward’s LinkNet HT distributed I/O nodes. If a feature
pack is purchased to enable this feature (see Appendix I), then these will be available via the
Configuration Menu (under Woodward Links) and the user is free to select any or all of the nodes listed
below. All distributed I/O channels have the same menu of functional choices as the lists above for the
Peak200 hardware I/O.

Table 1-7. Available (programmed) distributed I/O Nodes

Node Device ID Part Number Description I/O type/quantity


1 8200-1203 Analog 4-20 mA I/O 8 AI and 2 AO
2 reserved -- --
3 8200-1200 RTD Temperature Inputs 8 RTD
4 8200-1204 Discrete Input 16 DI
5 8200-1205 Discrete Output 16 DO

Figure 1-4. LinkNet HT Distributed I/O Node

Woodward 20
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


By adding the AI/AO LinkNet Node, the Peak200 can support up to four Vibration monitoring input signals
(4-20 mA inputs).

 Signals can be radial or axial – user can enter description in device TAG field to identify the sensor
location
 Each channel has range fault detection and Alarm and Trip (or Second ALM) Level Settings
 There is a setting to Trip if too many Vibration sensors are failed (for example, if 4 sensors are
brought into the Peak200 and 2 sensors minimum are required to run turbine)
 There will be a monitor page (as shown below) available from the Startup Curve page

By adding the RTD Input LinkNet Node, the Peak200 can support up to eight temperature monitoring
input signals.
 Signals can be 100 or 200 ohm sensors
 Supports American or European curve
 Configurable to display degrees F or C
 Each channel has range fault detection and Alarm and Trip (or Second ALM) Level Settings
The following table is the list of menu supported RTD input functions that assign functions to specific
channels.

Table 1-8. Menu Supported RTD Input Functions

Bearing Temperature #1 Temperature Monitoring #1


Bearing Temperature #2 Temperature Monitoring #2
Bearing Temperature #3 Temperature Monitoring #3
Bearing Temperature #4 Temperature Monitoring #4
Inlet Steam Temp Lube Oil Temperature
Exhaust Steam Temp
Turbine Casing Temp

Communications (To Plant Controls)


The Peak200 control is capable of communicating to a plant computer using Modbus protocol over either
serial or Ethernet communication links. All pertinent parameters are programmed to transfer through this
link.

It is also possible for the control to communicate via Ethernet to a plant computer using Woodward’s SOS
(Servlink-to-OPC Server) program in a read-only mode. To use this function reference the parameter
block name from the Modbus address list information provide in chapter 6.

See Chapter 6 for complete details.

Woodward 21
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 2.
Hardware Specification

Peak200 Description and Features


The Peak200 controller is a significant upgrade to the existing Peak150 product line with enhanced CPU,
Graphical display, communications, and I/O functions.

Note: This controller supports expanded I/O options when using Woodward CAN distributed LinkNet
I/O nodes.

Features
 5” LCD Display (800x480) and Keypad
 (LV) input power: 18-36 Vdc input, isolated
 (HV) input power: 88-264 Vac / 90-150 Vdc, isolated
 Bulkhead version same mounting as current Peak150

Communications
 (2) Ethernet 10/100 communication ports, isolated
 (2) CAN communication ports (1 Mbit), isolated
 RS-232/RS-485 port, isolated

I/O circuits
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms
 (2) Speed Sensor inputs (MPU 2K)
 (4) Analog input 4-20 mA channels (with Loop Power)
 (3) Analog output 4-20 mA channels
 Actuator output channels (configurable 4-20 mA/20-200 mA)
 (8) Discrete input channels (with Contact Power)
 (4) Relay outputs (form-c)

Figure 2-1. Functional Block Diagram (Peak200 Control)

Woodward 22
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-1. Environmental Specifications

Operating Bulkhead mount: –20 °C to +65 °C


Temperature Panel mount: –20 °C to +70 °C
Storage Temperature –30 °C to +70 °C (recommended 10 °C to 40 °C)
Vibration 1.04 Grms, industrial skid mount, per Woodward RV5
Shock1 10 G, 3x each axis, per Woodward MS2 procedure
Humidity2,3, 5 % to 95 %, non-condensing
Altitude 3000m (9842 ft.)
Installation Rating Bulkhead mount:
Pollution Degree 3, Overvoltage Category II
Panel mount:
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category II
Ingress Rating Bulkhead mount:
IP56(non ATEX/IECEx Applications)
IP54 ATEX/IECEx Applications
Panel mount:
IP20 (As shipped)
IP54 ATEX/IECEx Applications when installed in an enclosure
coded Ex nA or Ex e and providing a minimum ingress protection
rating of IP54 as defined in IEC60529
IP56 (Non ATEX/IECEx Applications) when installed in an
appropriate IP56 or higher rated enclosure
Conformal coating Polyacrylate, sulfur resistant (see AppNote #51530)
EMC Emissions EN 61000-6-4 (Heavy Industrial)
EMC Immunity EN 61000-6-2 (Heavy Industrial)
1
Limited by internal relay specification
2
Relative humidity levels of < 55% will prolong LCD life
3
Cyclic condensing humidity supported with an appropriate enclosure for panel mount version

Maintenance Info and Recommendations


The Peak200 Control design allows for continuous operation in a typical industrial environment and
includes no components that require periodic service. However, to take advantage of related product
software and hardware improvements, we recommend sending your product to a Woodward Authorized
Service Facility after every five years or 40k hours of continuous service for inspection and component
upgrades.

Clock battery
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery design lasts approximately 10 years during normal turbine operation.
When powered, the RTC automatically disables the battery usage to preserve it. During power-off, the
battery maintains date and time functions only. For long-term storage, the battery specification is greater-
than 5 years life.

The RTC battery is a replaceable lithium coin cell Woodward PN 1743-1017. Contact a Woodward
Authorized Service Center if a replacement service is needed.

Calibration and Functional verification


Recommend verifying calibration and functional operation every 24-36 months. This is essential for spare
units that need to be ready for immediate use. Contact a Woodward Authorized Service Center for
assistance.

Aluminum Electrolytic capacitors


Recommended applying power to spare units every 24-36 months for 3 hours to reform the electrolytic
capacitors used in the power module.

Woodward 23
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Display LCD with backlight
The Peak200 uses a low power LED backlight display with a life expectancy of 70K hours to half
brightness, at +25 °C operating temperature. If the display appears dim, use the “SCREEN SETTINGS”
menu to verify the brightness setting and adjust as needed with the ADJ ARROW-BRIGHTNESS keypad
combination. Contact a Woodward Authorize Service Center for a replacement display when display is
damaged or if display quality is unacceptable.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)


The Peak200 product family complies with Heavy Industrial EMC requirements per EN 61000-6-4 & EN
61000-6-2 specifications.

Emissions EN 61000-6-4
 Radiated RF Emissions Limits 30 MHz to 6000 MHz (per IEC 61000-6-4)
 Power Line Conducted RF Emissions Limits 150 kHz to 30 MHz (per IEC 61000-6-4).

Immunity EN 61000-6-2
 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) immunity to ±6 kV contact / ±8 kV air (per IEC 61000-4-2)
 Radiated RF Immunity to 10 V/m from 80 MHz to 2000 MHz, 1V/m from 2000 MHz to 2700MHz
(per IEC 61000-4-3)
 Electrical Fast Transients (EFT) Immunity to ±2.0 kV Power Supply inputs and +/-1.0 kV on signal
ports (per IEC 61000-4-4)
 Surge Immunity on DC Power Supply inputs to ±1.0 kV line to earth and ±0.5 kV line to line (per IEC
61000-4-5)
 Surge Immunity on AC Power Supply inputs to ±2.0 kV line to earth and ±1.0 kV line to line (per IEC
61000-4-5)
 Surge Immunity on I/O to ±1.0 kV line to earth (per IEC 61000-4-5)
 Conducted RF Immunity to 10 V (rms) from 150 kHz to 80 MHz (per IEC 61000-4-6)
 Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests on AC power supply port (per
EN61000-4-11)

Bulkhead Version Mounting Information


Packaging
Figure 2-2 is an outline drawing of the Peak200 control. All Peak200 control components are contained in
a single, NEMA 4X corrosion restive enclosure. The enclosure can be mounted indoors or out. Access to
internal components is through a left-hand-hinged door, which is securely closed by two latches. The
approximate size of the enclosure is 19 x 12 x 6.1 inches (approximately 483 x 305 x 155 mm).

Woodward 24
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 2-2. Peak200 Bulkhead unit

The enclosure has two gland plates in the bottom. It is up to end user
to drill holes appropriate for conduit hubs for wiring access.
Gland plates mounting screws are not tightened.
Ensure all screws are tightened after control is mounted and all wiring
finished. Recommended torque 31.7 inch-lbs (3.5Nm)

If it is necessary to meet NEMA 4X requirements, you must use the


appropriate conduit hubs and conduit when installing this control.

When using the stainless steel hubs to meet the NEMA 4X


requirements, ensure the ground post on the conduit hubs is
positioned down to allow the front door to fully and properly close.

All internal components are industrial grade. The components include the CPU (central processing unit),
its memory, the switching power supply, all relays, all input/output circuitry, and all communications
circuitry for the front door display, touch keypad, remote RS-232, and RS-485 Modbus communications.

Mounting
The standard Peak200 control enclosure must be vertically mounted on a wall or 19" (483 mm) rack,
allowing sufficient room for lid opening and wiring access. Two welded flanges, one on the right side and
one on the left side, permit secure mounting.

Peak200 unit has the identical mounting hole pattern as the Peak150,
however power and I/O terminal block placement and size within the unit
do not match Peak150 pattern. Check table below for details.

Peak200 unit does NOT feature RS-422 communication interface.

Woodward 25
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Wiring Differences between Peak150 and Peak200


Table 2-2. Peak200 and Peak150 Wiring Differences

Peak150 Peak200
Housing: Housing:
Dimensions: 19” x 12” x 4” Dimensions: 19” x 12” x 4”

Opens from left to right Opens from right to left


Woodward provided bushings Customer needs to mount bushings
Power input: Power input:
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 12 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 3 pins, Ground, PS+, PS- Connector pins: 3 pins, Ground, PS+, PS-

Length of cables inside housing: Length of cables inside housing:


~6 – 14inch ~6 – 14inch
Discrete outputs: Discrete outputs:
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 8 pins, 4 Relays. Use of NO or Connector pins: 12 pins, 4 Relays, NO, NC, COM
NC configurable with jumpers on PCBA. terminals accessible for all relays

Length of cables inside housing: Length of cables inside housing:


~6 – 14inch ~6 – 14inch
Discrete inputs: Discrete inputs:
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 9 pins, 8 inputs + 1 common Connector pins: 13 pins, 8 inputs, 1 common return,
return pin 3 pins with Contact Power Supply (24V) and 1 shield
pin
Length of cables inside housing:
~6 – 14inch Length of cables inside housing:
~6 – 14inch

Electrical: Electrical:
Internal jumper on PCB that polarizes input Return pin is connected to negative potential of
terminal when work with 28V power supply isolated power supply. Work with external power
common with Analog Outputs. supply is possible when common pin tied to external
power supply negative.

Woodward 26
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Peak150 Peak200
RS-232: RS-232:
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 5 pins, TX, RX, SIGGND, DTR Connector pins: 4 pins, TX, RX, COMGND, SHIELD
(constantly tied to 9V), SHIELD,
there is an access to +5VM communication power
on external pin
RS-422/RS-485: RS-485 (RS-422 not available):
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 8 pins, 422-TX+, 422-TX-, Connector pins: 8 pins, 232-TX, 232-RX-, 485+,
485/422-RX+, 485/422-RX-, SIGGND, TERM+, 485-, SIGGND, TERM+, TERM-, SHIELD
TERM-, SHIELD, there is an access to +5VM
communication power on external pin
Analog outputs (2 channels): Analog outputs (3 channels):
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 6 pins, AOUTx+, AOUTx-, 2x Connector pins: 10 pins, AOUTX+, AOUTX-, 3x
SHIELD pins SHIELD pins

Electrical: Electrical:
Analog output 1 and 2 can work as 4-20mA or 0- All analog outputs work in 4-20mA industrial
1mA output. Change of mode is through jumpers standard. Current read back is present.
on PCBA. No current read backs.
Actuator output: Actuator output:
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 3 pins, ACT+, ACT-, SHIELD Connector pins: 3 pins, ACT+, ACT-, SHIELD

Electrical: Electrical:
Change of mode is through jumpers on PCBA. No Change of mode is done inside software. Current
current read backs. read back is present.

Speed inputs (2 channels): Speed inputs (2 channels):


Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 6 pins, SPEEDX+, SPEEDX-, 2x Connector pins: 6 pins, SPEEDX+, SPEEDX-, 2x
SHIELD pin SHIELD pin

Woodward 27
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Peak150 Peak200
Analog input (1 channel): Analog input (4 channels):
Wires gauge limits: min 24 AWG max 10 AWG Wires gauge limits: min 28 AWG max 16 AWG

Wire mount method: screw connection with Wire mount method: screw connection to pluggable
tension sleeve to PCB terminal block connector

Connector pins: 3 pins, AIN+, AIN-, SHIELD Connector pins: 10 pins, AINX+, AINX-, 4x SHIELD
pin
Electrical:
4-20mA, 1 – 5V input. Internal 250ohm is Electrical:
connected or disconnected using jumpers on Only 4-20mA mode. Shunt resistance is 160ohm
PCBA. No dedicated loop power supply. and input impedance around 200ohms.
Service port: Service port (debug port):

Connection: DB-9 female socket On Peak200, there is no port with the same
functionality as service port on Peak150.
Purpose: Connection for Hand Held programmer
tool. For modification of service parameters. There is a service port to configure Peak200
VXWorks system for use.

There are additional communication ports:


CAN, Ethernet ports

The physical outline dimensions for the Peak200 control are shown below. See Woodward Reference
drawing 9989-1335 for additional details if necessary.

Woodward 28
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 2-3. Peak200 Bulkhead Mount Version Outline Drawing.

Woodward 29
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Panel version Mounting information –

Figure 2-4. Peak200 Front Panel Mount Unit

• There are 8 x 10-32 UNF-2B tapped holes used to mount the Peak200.
• The holes are tapped to 0.312” min Depth. Choose the proper length screw, which does not exceed
this depth into the Bezel.
• Use screw 1069-949 (.375 Long, 10-32) for panel thickness (including washers) .065” - .100"
• Use screw 1069-948 (.438 Long, 10-32) for panel thickness (including washers) .101”- .125”
• Use screw 1069-946 (.500 Long, 10-32) for panel thickness (including washers) .126” - .187”

Woodward 30
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


See Woodward Reference drawing 9989-1337 for additional details if necessary.

Figure 2-5. Peak200 Front Panel Mount Version Outline Drawing.

Woodward 31
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Input Power Specification


Specifications (LV)
LV Input Voltage range: 18-36 Vdc
Input Power (max): < 45 W, 2.5A max
Output Voltage Holdup time: > 14 ms with 24 Vdc input voltage
Isolation to other circuits: > 500 Vrms to all other circuits
Isolation to EARTH: > 500 Vrms to EARTH

Input Overvoltage Protection:±60 Vdc @ 25 °C


Reverse Polarity Protection: 60 Vdc @ 25 °C
Input Undervoltage shutdown: ~11 Vdc, non-latching

Note: Breaker or power-line fusing of 8 A min is recommended to protect the power-wiring network from
possible wiring shorts.

Specifications (HV)
HV Input Voltage range: 88-264 Vac / 90-150 Vdc
HV Input Frequency range: 45-65 Hz
Input Power (AC max): < 45 W, 0.7 Arms max
Input Power (DC max): < 45 W, 0.5 A max

Output Voltage Holdup time: > 30 ms with 110 Vac input voltage
Output Voltage Holdup time: > 120 ms with 220 Vac input voltage
Isolation to other circuits: > 3000 Vrms to all other circuits
Isolation to EARTH: > 1500 Vrms to EARTH

Input Overvoltage Protection:±375 Vdc @ 25 °C


Reverse Polarity Protection: 375 Vdc
Input Undervoltage Shutdown: ~65 Vdc, non-latching

Note: Breaker or power-line fusing of 3.5 A min is recommended to protect the power wiring network from
possible wiring shorts.

Power Connector
Input Power is provided through a 3 position, latching terminal block with removable plug. Green
connectors are used for low voltage DC units. Orange connectors are used for high voltage AC/DC units.

Table 2-3. Input Power Connector Pinout

Board Connection PIN Name Description


1 L+ Input Power (+)
2 L- Input Power (–)
3 EARTH Earth / shield connection
Plug Type: Side entry 7.62 mm, 12 A, pluggable with latching screw down

To reduce the risk of Electrical Shock the Protective Earth (PE) must
be connected to the PE terminal on the enclosure. The conductor
providing the connection must have a properly sized ring lug and wire
Electric Shock
gauge equal to or larger than 4mm² (12AWG).

Visual Indicators (LED’s) & CPU Configuration

Visual indicators are located on the Front Panel keypad, the controller board, back cover, and related
communications ports for diagnostic use.

Woodward 32
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


CPU OK indicator (green/red)
This bi-color LED indicates the CPU status is operational (green) or faulty (red). The CPU will flash fault
codes (red) if they exist. This LED exists on both the Front Panel and back cover.

IOLOCK indicator (red)


Indicate the controller is shutdown and held in an IOLOCK state. This LED exists on both the Front Panel
and back cover.

ALARM indicator (yellow)


Viewable from the front panel and controlled by GAP software.

TRIPPED indicator (red)


Viewable from the front panel and controlled by GAP software.

Ethernet LED's
(green=link, yellow=traffic) on each RJ45 connector indicate port status and operation.

Communications (Ethernet)
There are (2) isolated RJ45 Ethernet Ports (10/100 Mbit/sec) available to the application software for
system use. These ports are full duplex with auto crossover detection.

Features
• Interface standard: IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)
• Port Isolation: 1500 Vrms to PS, EARTH, and all other circuits
• Control configuration using Woodward AppManager
• Control monitoring, trending, and Datalog collection
• Control configuration of Ethernet IP addresses
• General communications such as Modbus master/slave
• Manage Configuration data and tunables with Control Assistant
• Network time setup and control (SNTP)

Network Configuration
Ethernet ports (ETH1-2) can be configured for the customer network as desired. See the on-site Network
Administrator to define an appropriate I/P address configuration.

ETHERNET CABLES—Max cable length is 100 meters. To ensure


signal integrity and robust operation, double shielded (SSTP) Cat5
Ethernet cables are required for customer installations.
(Woodward PN 5417-394, 10 feet)

This module has been factory configured with fixed Ethernet IP


addresses of
 Ethernet #1 (ETH1) = 172.16.100.15, Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0
 Ethernet #2 (ETH2) = 192.168.128.20, Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0

Each of the ETHERNET ports is required to be configured for a unique


subnet (domain) (view default settings as an example).

Woodward 33
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-4. Ethernet Ports #1-2 (10/100)

Board Connection Description


Pin 1 – TX+
Pin 2 – TX-
Pin 3 – RX+
Pin 4 – not used
Pin 5 – not used
Pin 6 – RX-
Pin 7 – not used
Pin 8 – not used
SHIELD = Chassis
Note: Ports #3 and #4 are disabled and blanked GND
off.

Network Configuration Utility (AppManager)


Woodward's AppManager™ software can be used to configure network setting and load Control software
(GAP), HMI display software (QT), and operating system service packs. The AppManager utility can be
downloaded from www.woodward.com/software.

A PC connection must be made to Ethernet #1 (ETH1) using a RJ45 Ethernet cable.

Note: AppManager can always be used to “discover/view” the current CPU IP Address. However, to
modify settings or load applications, the PC running AppManager must be reconfigured to be on the
same “network” as the CPU.

 Locate the ControlName on the module faceplate and highlight it in AppManager.


 To VIEW the IP address configuration, select menu option CONTROL - CONTROL INFORMATION.
Look for the Ethernet adapter addresses under the Footprint Description.
 To CHANGE the IP address configuration, select menu option CONTROL - CHANGE NETWORK
SETTINGS.

Communications (CAN)
Two (2) Isolated CAN ports are available for general communications as well as simplex or redundant
distributed control. Compatible devices include Woodward LINKnet HT nodes, DVP valve products, and
other third party devices. Removable latching connector plugs are provided for field wiring.

Network Termination: CAN networks must include a 120 Ω termination resistor at each end of the trunk
line.

Network Topology: Daisy chain connections between multiple devices are recommended. Any drop cable
connection of a device to the trunk line should be as short as possible and much less than six meters.
Recommend designing the network trunk to be less than 100 meters with a max cumulative drop length of
less than 39 meters.

Important: For 1 Mbit/sec communication it is required that, each drop cable be less than one meter and
as short as possible.

Woodward 34
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-5. CAN Specifications

Interface Standard CAN 2.0B, CANopen


Network Connections (2) CAN ports, separate connectors
Network Isolation 500 Vrms to EARTH, other CAN ports, all other I/O
Network Speed/Length 1 Mbit @ 30 m
500 Kbit @ 100 m
250 Kbit @ 250 m (thick cable only, otherwise limited to 100 m)
125 Kbit @ 500 m (thick cable only, otherwise limited to 100 m)
Network Termination: (120 ± 10) Ω is required at each end of the network trunk line.
**The termination resistor is NOT built into the hardware.
CAN Address Software configurable
CAN Baud Rate Software configurable for 125 K, 500 K, 250 K, and 1 Mbit
Cable / Part Number 2008-1512 (120 Ω, 3-wire, shielded twisted pair)
—Belden YR58684 or similar
Cable Drops (1 Mbit) CAN Cable drops shall be < 1 m and as short as possible
Cable Drops (500K, etc) CAN Cable drops shall be < 6 m and as short as possible
**If needed, an isolated CAN to USB converter is IXXAT, HW221245

Table 2-6. CAN Connector Pinout

Board Connection PIN Color Description


1 BLACK CAN Signal Ground
2 BLUE CAN Low
3 Shield CAN Shield (30 Meg + AC coupled to EARTH)
4 WHITE CAN High
5 n/a Not used, no internal connection
Plug Type: Side entry 3.5 mm, 8 A, pluggable with latching screw down
Max wire size: 1.3 mm² / 16 AWG for single wires, 0.5 mm² / 20 AWG for two wires

CAN Cable Specifications


Belden YR58684 (Woodward PN 2008-1512) communications / CAN cable is approved and
recommended. This is a smaller and more flexible 0.3 mm² / 22 AWG, low capacitance cable suitable for
tight routing in industrial environments.

Table 2-7. CAN Cable Specifications

Belden YR58684, bulk cable (Woodward PN 2008-1512)

Impedance: 120 Ω 10 % at 1 MHz


DC resistance: 17.5 Ω per 1000 ft
Cable capacitance: 11 pF/ft at 1 kHz
0.3 mm² / 22 AWG, 7 strands, individually tinned, FEP insulation
Data Pair:
(BLUE, WHITE twisted pair)
Ground: 0.3 mm² / 22 AWG, 7 strands, individually tinned, FEP insulation (BLACK)
Drain / Shield Wire: 0.3 mm² / 22 AWG, 7 strands, individually tinned
Shielding: Foil 100 % with outer Braid 65 %
Jacket: FEP Insulation, BLACK
Cable type: 1.5 pair, twisted shielded
Outer Diameter: 0.244 inch
Bend Radius: 2.5 inches
Temperature: –70 °C to +125 °C

Woodward 35
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Belden YR58684, bulk cable (Woodward PN 2008-1512)

Impedance: 120 Ω 10 % at 1 MHz


Similar Cable: Belden 3106A (has different colors & lower temperature specs)

CAN Wiring / Shield Terminations & Limitations


For robust communications performance, the CAN cabling needs to minimize the exposed, non-shielded
cable section that occurs at terminal blocks. The exposed length of CAN wiring must be limited to less
than 3.8 cm / 1.5 inches from the end of the shield to the terminal block.

CAN shields are terminated to chassis (EARTH) through a capacitor-resistor network (designed into the
Flex500 / Peak200 hardware products). However, the shield must also be directly terminated to chassis
(Earth) at one point in the network. In the case of Woodward equipment, locate the direct ground at the
master device end, as it exits the master device’s enclosure.

Always use shielded cables for improved communications in industrial


environments. Wire terminations should expose as little
un-shielded cable as possible (less than 3.8 cm / 1.5 inches).

Communications (RS-232/RS-485)
An isolated, configurable RS-232 / 485 serial port is available for customer use, as configured by the GAP software
application. RS-422 communications is NOT supported.

Specifications
 Interface standard: RS-232C and RS-485
 Isolation: 500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O
 Baud Rates: 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, and 115.2 K
 Max Distance (RS-232): 15 m (50 feet) max
 Max Distance (RS-485): 1220 m (4000 feet) max
 A shielded cable is required when using this port.
 RS-485 networks require termination at both ends with approximately 90–120 Ω impedance that
matches the characteristic impedance of the cable used.

Cable Note: Woodward cable 2008-1512 (3-wire) is a shielded, low capacitance 120-ohm cable that
is designed for communications. This cable is also used for CAN communications.

Table 2-8. COM1 Serial Port (RS-232/485)

Board Connection Description


Pin 1 – RS-232 Transmit
Pin 2 – RS-232 Receive
Pin 3 – Signal Common
Pin 4 – Shield (AC)
Pin 5 – RS-485 (+)
(8 pins)
Pin 6 – Termination Resistor (+)
Pin 7 – Termination Resistor (-)
Pin 8 – RS-485 (-)
Plug Type: Side entry 3.5 mm, 8 A, pluggable with latching screw down
Max wire size: 1.3 mm² / 16 AWG for single wires, 0.5 mm² / 20 AWG for two wires

Woodward 36
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 2-6. COM1 Example RS-485 Wiring

Woodward 37
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Hardware - Terminal Blocks & Wiring


Back cover view with wiring label.

Figure 2-7. Peak200 Back Cover Label – Bulkhead

Woodward 38
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 2-8. Peak200 Back Cover Label – Front Panel Mount

Woodward 39
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 2-9. Terminal Block Connectors

I/O Signal Specifications and Wiring


Hardware - Speed Sensor Inputs
This controller includes two (2) Digital Speed Sensor circuits that are capable of interfacing to MPU speed
probe sensors.

Features
 Two (2) Digital Speed Sensor circuits, isolated individually
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms

Woodward 40
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-9. Specifications (Speed)

MPU Input Voltage: 1 to 35 Vrms


MPU Input Frequency: 10 Hz to 35 KHz
MPU Input Impedance: 2000 Ω
MPU Input Isolation: 500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O 500 Vrms to other MPU channel

Max Speed Range: Software Selectable from 5 kHz to 35 kHz


Accuracy (-20,70c): < ±0.01% of full scale range selected
Resolution: > 22 bits
Speed Filter (ms): 5-10,000 ms (2 poles)
Derivative Filter (ms): 5-10,000 ms (speed filter + 1 pole)
Derivative Accuracy: 0.1% of full scale range, over full temperature range
Acceleration limit: 1-10,000 %/sec

Figure 2-10. Speed Sensor Block Diagram

Hardware - Analog Inputs (4-20 mA)

AI Description and Features


The Peak200 includes four (4) 4–20 mA input channels for I/O monitoring and control. Each channel is
differential (self-powered) but can be software configured for Loop Power mode. An Isolated Loop Power
(+24 Vdc) is provided for analog input transducers and includes short-circuit/over-voltage protection.
Note: Do not use the Loop Power output to power any other type devices.

Features
 Four (4) 4–20 mA Analog Input Channels, 16 bit resolution
 Differential inputs with high common-mode voltage capability
 Isolated Loop Power +24 V is provided with short-circuit protection
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms
 GAP configurable for Loop power operation

Woodward 41
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-10. Specifications (AI)

Number of channels 4
AI Input Range 0 to 24 mA
0 V channel to channel
AI Input Isolation
500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O (except USB)
AI Accuracy (@ 25 °C) ≤ 0.024 mA (0.1% of FS=24 mA)
AI Accuracy (–20, +70 °C) ≤ 0.06 mA (0.25% of FS=24 mA)
AI Resolution ~16 bits of full scale
AI Hardware filter 2 poles @ ~10 ms
AI Input Impedance 200 ohms (Rsense = 162 ohms)
AI Loop power output 24 V ±14% (0-250 mA) short circuit & diode protected
AI Loop power Isolation 500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O

AI CMRR over temp > 70 dB @ 50/60 Hz (typical 86 db)


AI CMVR > 200 V (dc) to EARTH
AI Overvoltage ±36 V (dc) continuous at room temperature

Figure 2-11. Analog Input – Self-Powered Block Diagram

Figure 2-12. Analog Input – Loop-Powered Block Diagram

Hardware - Analog Outputs (4-20 mA)


This control provides an isolated group of (3) 4-20 mA outputs for customer use. Each output can drive up
to 600-ohm loads and provides fault monitoring of individual source and return currents.

Features
 Three Analog Output channels (4-20 mA)
 Source and return current monitors
 Group isolated from other circuits
 Capable of driving higher impedance loads up to 600 ohms
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms

Woodward 42
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-11. Specifications (AO)

Number of channels 3 (each with readback)


AO Output Range 0 to 24 mA, 0 mA during shutdown
0 V channel to channel
AO Output Isolation
500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O
AO Accuracy (@ 25 °C) ≤ 0.024 mA (0.1% of FS=24 mA)
AO Accuracy (–20, +70 °C) ≤ 0.120 mA (0.5% of FS=24 mA)
AO Resolution ~14 bits of full scale
AO Hardware filter (max) 3 poles @ 250 μs
600 Ω at 20 mA
AO Load Capability
AO Output Readbacks (0 to 24) mA, source and return
AO Readback Accuracy < 1% at 25°C, < 3% over full temperature range
AO Readback HW Filter ~0.5 ms nominal
AO circuits are driven to 0 mA during power-up, power-down, core
IOLOCK state
voltage failures, and watchdog failures

Figure 2-13. Analog Output Block Diagram

Hardware - Actuator Outputs


This control provides an isolated Actuator output for customer use. Actuator driver can be configured for
low-range (20 mA) or high-range (200 mA) operation. Fault monitoring of individual source and return
currents is included.

Features
 One (1) Actuator Output channel (4-20 mA, 20-200 mA)
 Source and return current monitoring
 Isolated from other circuits
 Capable of driving higher impedance loads
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms

Woodward 43
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-12. Specifications (ACT)

Number of channels (1) proportional driver with source & return readbacks
ACT Output Range Configurable for 24 mA or 200 mA range
ACT Output Range (low) 0-24 mA, 0 mA during shutdown (FS = 24 mA)
ACT Output Range (high) 0-200 mA, 0 mA during shutdown (FS = 210 mA)
0 V channel to channel
ACT Output Isolation 500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O

ACT Accuracy (25 °C) Low Range ≤ 0.024 mA (0.1%) High Range ≤ 0.21 mA (0.1%)
ACT Accuracy (–20, +70 °C) Low Range ≤ 0.120 mA (0.5%) High Range ≤ 1.00 mA (0.5%)

ACT Resolution ~14 bits of full scale


ACT Hardware filter (max) 3 poles @ 500 μs
ACT Load Capability (low) 600 Ω at 20 mA
ACT Load Capability (high) 65 Ω at 200 mA

ACT Output Readbacks (0 to 24) mA, source and return


ACT Readback Accuracy < 1% at 25°C, < 3% over full temperature range, (source & return)
ACT Readback HW Filter ~0.5 ms nominal

Front panel TRIP button will shut down the actuator circuit, remove
TRIP action
actuator power, and set an alarm in GAP software.
During IOLOCK, ACT power is shutdown and ACT circuits are driven to
IOLOCK action 0 mA during power-up, power-down, core voltage failures, and
watchdog failures.

Figure 2-14. Actuator Output Block Diagram

Hardware - Discrete Inputs


This control provides an isolated group of (8) discrete input channels for use with +24 V (dc) signals. An
isolated Contact Power voltage supply of +24 V (dc) is provided to use with the discrete inputs. This
supply includes short-circuit and over-voltage protection.
Note: Do not use the Contact Power output to power any other devices.

Features
 Eight Discrete Input Channels for +24 V (dc) signals
 +24 V Contact Power with short-circuit and diode protection
 Isolated power and discrete input group
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms
 Time-stamping capability (1 ms)

Woodward 44
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-13. Specifications (DI)

Number of Channels 8
DI Input Low State (0 to 8) V (dc)
DI Input High State (16 to 32) V (dc)
DI Input Current < 5 mA per channel
DI Input Impedance 25K approximately
DI Hardware Filter 1.0 ms approximately at room temp
0 V channel to channel
DI Channel Isolation
500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O
DI Overvoltage Overvoltage to 36 V (dc) for inputs
Contact Power Output 24 V ±14 %, 150 mA (max), short circuit & diode protected
Contact Power Isolation 500 Vrms to EARTH and all other I/O

Figure 2-15. Discrete Input Block Diagram

Note: Routing wetting voltage or common wires with signal wires and shielding of DI/DO field wires
are recommended due to the possibility of large transients from load dump of high-current inductive
loads and indirect lightning strike currents flowing in Protective Earth (PE) ground. If wires are routed
separately from commons and are not shielded, transients that are large enough will be coupled into
the input or output wiring and cause state changes to the signals for a short time.

Hardware - Relay Outputs


This control provides (4) Isolated, Form-C Relay outputs with NO, COM, NC contacts available at the
terminal block.

Features
 Four Relay Output Channels
 Each Relay Output provides NO, COM, and NC contacts
 Each Relay Output channel provides a coil voltage readback fault
 Woodward GAP block, diagnostics, and configuration support
 Contact isolation maintained at terminal blocks
 ATEX approved version available using hermetically sealed relays
 GAP configurable update rates of 5 ms to 160 ms

Woodward 45
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 2-14. Specifications (Relay Outputs)

Number of channels (4) relays


Contact Type Form-C with NO, COM, and NC terminals
STD Relay, contacts (DC) 2 A, 5-30 Vdc (resistive)
STD Relay, contacts (AC) 2 A, 115 Vac (resistive)
STD Relay, operate time < 15 ms typical
RELAY Coil Readback Coil voltage readback status is available
RELAY Coil Rdbk Filter 1 ms approximately at room temp

RELAY Output Isolation 500 Vrms minimum to EARTH and all other I/O
RELAY Contact Isolation 500 Vrms minimum between open contacts
RELAY to RELAY Isolation 500 Vrms minimum between relays
Relay outputs are de-energized during power-up, power-down, core
IOLOCK State
voltage failures and watchdog failures

ATEX version: The ATEX approved control uses a Hermetically sealed relay
ATX Relay, contacts (DC) 2 A, 5-28 Vdc (resistive), 0.75A @ 28V (inductive)
ATX Relay, contacts (AC)** 0.3 A, 115 Vac (resistive)

**ATEX/IECEx Compliance requires relay contact loads be limited to


< 32 Vac rms / < 32 Vdc.

Explosion Hazard

Figure 2-16. Relay Output Block Diagram

Troubleshooting Fault Codes


The CPU board runs diagnostics that display troubleshooting messages through the debug Service Port
and AppManager. Additional information on diagnostics tests, subsequent LED flash codes, and serial
port messages is contained in the VxWorks manual.

Table 2-15. CPU Fault LED Flash Codes

Failure Flash Code


CPU not operational, IOLOCK state Solid Red
RAM Test Failure 2, 1
FPGA Test Failure 2, 9
Watchdog not enabled 2, 10
RAM drive error 2, 11
Flash drive error 2, 12

Woodward 46
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Troubleshooting & Commissioning checks


Power checks
 Verify proper polarity on power connections
 Verify power source and wire size is sufficient for all loads
 Verify input power voltage is correct (i.e.: low voltage unit is 18 V to 36 Vdc)
 Verify PS(+) and PS(–) impedance to EARTH is > 10 MΩ

RS-232 wiring checks


 Verify the RS-232 wiring uses a high quality shielded communication cable. For example, Woodward
2008-1512 (Belden YR58684) or equivalent low capacitance, shielded communications wire.
 Verify the RS-232 wiring uses the signal common (COM1_GND)
 Verify RS-232 network length is within specifications (typically < 50 feet)
 Verify Signal wires (TX+,RX-) are not shorted to each other
 Verify Signal wires (TX+,RX-) are not shorted to COM1_GND
 Verify Signal wires (TX+,RX-) are not shorted to COM1_SHLD
 Verify Signal wires (TX+,RX-) are not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify COM1_GND is not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify the overall cable shield is terminated to EARTH at only (1) location.

RS-485 wiring checks


 Verify the RS-485 wiring uses a high quality shielded communication cable. For example, Woodward
2008-1512 (Belden YR58684) or equivalent low capacitance, shielded communications wire.
 Verify RS-485 network length is within spec for the baud-rate (typically < 4000 feet)
 Verify the network is terminated properly at both ends with approx. 90–120 Ώ
 Verify the RS-485 wiring uses the signal common (COM1_GND)
 Verify Signal wires (RS-485+, RS-485–) are not shorted to each other
 Verify Signal wires (RS-485+, RS-485–) are not shorted to COM1_GND
 Verify Signal wires (RS-485+, RS-485–) are not shorted to COM1_SHLD
 Verify Signal wires (RS-485+, RS-485–) are not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify COM1_GND is not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify the overall cable shield is terminated to EARTH at only (1) location.

CAN wiring checks


 Verify the CAN wiring uses a high quality, 3-wire, shielded communication cable. For example,
Woodward 2008-1512 (Belden YR58684) or equivalent low capacitance, shielded communications
wire.
 Verify CAN network length is < max length spec for the baud rate being used
 Verify network is terminated properly at both ends with 120 Ω, ±10%
 Verify the CAN wiring uses the signal common (CAN_GND)
 Verify CAN drop cables to each device are as short as possible and meets spec.
 Verify CANH is not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify CANL is not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify CAN_COM is not connected to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH
 Verify CAN_SHLD shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–)
 Verify the CAN overall cable shield is terminated to EARTH at only (1) location for each network.
 For redundant CAN devices, verify CAN1 and CAN2 networks are not miswired and connected
together.

Woodward 47
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

AI (non-loop), Analog Input wiring checks


 Verify that external XDCR's are NOT used with these self-powered channels.
 Verify each AI(+,–) is not shorted to another input channel.
 Verify each AI(+) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AI(–) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AI shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–).
 Verify each AI shield wire is terminated at the node properly.
 Functionally verify the wiring for each AI channel using a simulator source.

AI (Loop power), Analog Input wiring checks


 Verify that external XDCR's are connected to these channels.
 Verify the LPWR voltage level (+24 V dc) is correct for the XDCR.
 Verify each LPWR(+) terminal is wired to the XDCR POWER(+).
 Verify each LPWR(+) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AI(–) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AI shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–).
 Verify each AI shield wire is terminated at the node properly.
 Verify that all XDCR's channels use less than 250 mA of LPWR.
 Functionally verify the wiring for each AI channel using a simulator source.

AO, Analog Output wiring checks


 Verify each AO(+,–) is not shorted to another output channel.
 Verify each AO(+,–) is not shorted to another Analog Input channel.
 Verify each AO(+) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AO(–) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each AO shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–).
 Verify each AO shield wire is terminated at the node properly.
 Functionally verify the wiring for each AOUT by driving 4 mA and 20 mA to the load from the GAP
application. Verify correct output current with a meter. Verify the correct SRC_RDBK & RET_RDBK
values in GAP.

DI, Discrete Input wiring checks


 Verify each DI(+) is not shorted to another input.
 Verify each DI(+) is not shorted to CPWR(+), CPWR(–), PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each DI(+) wiring is functional by setting each input HIGH (>16 V DC) and then LOW (<8 V
DC). Verify GAP software detects the state change.
 When possible, consider using a shielded DIN cable.

DI, Contact Power (CPWR) wiring checks


 CPWR(+) is an output voltage, it should never be connected to any other supply.
 To maintain node isolation, verify CPWR(–) is not shorted to PS(–).
 Using the internal isolated Contact Power output (CPWR,COM) is highly recommended to maintain
discrete input isolation for other plant devices / controls
 Verify CPWR(+) is not connected to CPWR(–), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify CPWR(–) is not connected to CPWR(+), PS(+), EARTH.
 Verify CPWR voltage meets spec at the terminal block (18 to 32 V dc).

DO Relays, Relay wiring checks


 Verify each Relay output (NO,C,NC) contact is connected to the load properly
 Verify each Relay output (NO,C,NC) is not shorted to another output channel.
 Verify the function of each Relay output (NC,NO) wiring by driving each output ON then OFF. Verify
the GAP software detects the readback state change.
 When possible, consider using shielded wiring for relay cables.

Woodward 48
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Additional wiring checks when using LINKnet nodes

TC, Thermocouple Input wiring checks


 Verify each TC(+,–) is not shorted to another input channel.
 Verify each TC(+) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each TC(–) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each TC shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–).
 Verify no wires are landed accidently on the NC, no-connect terminals.
 Verify each TC shield wire is terminated at the node properly.
 Functionally verify the wiring for each TC channel using a simulator source.
 TC OPENS: A TC input will read MAX DegC if the (+) or (–) wire is broken / open.
 TC SHORTS: A TC input will read zero DegC if the (+) and (–) wires are shorted.

GROUND FAULTS: Input channels accidently shorted to EARTH will


be more susceptible to spurious noise events related to the
installation and environment.

RTD, Input wiring checks


 Verify each RTD(+,–) is not shorted to another input channel.
 Verify each RTD(+) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each RTD(–) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each RTD(sense) terminal is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–), EARTH.
 Verify each RTD(sense) terminal is connected properly for 3-wire sensors.
 Verify each RTD(sense) terminal is jumpered to RTD(–) for 2-wire sensors.
 Verify each RTD shield wire is not shorted to PS(+), PS(–).
 Verify each RTD shield wire is terminated at the node properly.
 Functionally verify the wiring for each RTD channel using a simulator source.
 RTD OPENS: RTD channels will read MAX DegC if the (+) or (–) wire is broken.

Woodward 49
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 3.
Control Description

Introduction
The Peak200 is designed to operate Steam Turbines with a single-valve or a single-valve rack that are
applied in mechanical drive applications such as pumps, fans, blowers, compressors, etc.

The Peak200 is a product that integrates control hardware, control software and a graphical user
interface (GUI) into a single package. The design of control logic is such that the user can configure the
system in the field for any of the above applications, and operate the unit completely from the front panel
display.

The Speed Relationship diagram (Figure 3-1) shows how the speed settings in the Peak200 relate to
each other, and may be helpful when configuring the Peak200 speed setpoints

Figure 3-1. Speed Relationships

Front Panel View

Figure 3-2. Front Panel

The keypad is the same on the Bulkhead or Panel mounted versions.

Woodward 50
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Four Fixed Operational Action Buttons on Front Panel


RESET—The Peak200 latches when it senses an ALARM or a TRIP condition. After clearing the ALARM
or TRIP condition, pressing the ALARM RESET button will clear the latch function. Normal start sequence
is to push the ALARM RESET button then the START button.

Along with the ALARM RESET button, you can reset the Peak200 externally with the RESET discrete
input, or with the Modbus RESET command.

START—Pressing the START button initiates the Turbine Start Sequence. The START button is inactive
until all TRIPS are cleared and RESET.

 In the MANUAL START MODE, pressing the START button opens the VALVE RAMP and
ACTUATOR while a turbine operator controls the turbine speed with a trip & throttle valve. Governor
speed control begins at the MIN GOVERNOR SPEED.

 In the AUTO START MODE, pressing the START button opens the VALVE RAMP and ACTUATOR
while a turbine operator controls the turbine speed with a trip & throttle valve. Governor speed
control begins at IDLE SPEED.

 Either START MODE begins operating when the Peak200 receives a START command from the
START button, the START discrete input, or a Modbus START command.

If the external START input is closed, the RESET button will both RESET and START the Peak200.

 In the MANUAL START MODE, the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT will RAMP to the MIN GOVERNOR
SPEED.

 In the AUTO START MODE, the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT will RAMP to IDLE speed. When the IDLE
/ MIN GOV input is closed, the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT will ramp to MIN GOVERNOR SPEED.

ADJUST Up/Down— Button used to adjust all analog values that are available as tunables (on any
screens) once that parameter is ‘in focus’. If the Shift button ( ) above the Adjust button is pressed at
the same time the value will change at a faster rate.

TRIP—Pressing the TRIP button will trip the turbine. When pressed it sets the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT
to minus 1, drives the VALVE RAMP (ACTUATOR) to zero (closed position), and changes the state of the
TRIP RELAY. In the Service menu, there is an option to add a 2-second delay to this command to
prevent nuisance trips if the button is pressed accidentally. The default setting of this delay is zero
(immediate).

Woodward 51
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

User Login Levels


Pressing the MODE key at any time will open the Login and Mode Screen

Figure 3-3. Mode Screen

Monitor – (logout to enter this)


Even Keypad Green keys inhibited

Operator – Default password: in chapter 8


Intended for normal turbine operation – default mode
Screen saver initiates to this level

Service – Default password: in chapter 8


Allows tuning of parameters, while turbine is running (PID dynamics) and entering of Calibration Mode

Configure – Default password: in chapter 8


Highest user authority / can enter any Mode

The TRIP button is always available in all modes and logins.

If your unit supports Multi-Lingual operation – then the icon will appear in the upper right of the
Mode screen. Navigating to this icon and pressing Enter will open a pop-up dialog box that will allow the
user to select a language other than English for the local display.

Figure 3-4. Language

Woodward 52
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Once selected the GUI file must be rebooted to initialize all text in the selected language. The Re-Start
GUI button will do this, the screen will go to the ‘Splash screen’ while the GUI re-initializes. This can be
done at any time, including during normal operation of the turbine. During this time (a couple of minutes),
the control will continue to operate the turbine and any other visualization programs being used will
continue to operate normally.

To Login –
1. Press the LOGIN button
2. ** Navigate so the Login or Password field is highlighted (in-focus)
3. Press Enter on the Navigation Cross
4. Use the keypad to enter the text field (hold key down to scroll options)
5. Press Enter on the Navigation Cross – to accept your entry

** Or you can navigate to the Autofill buttons and press Enter – it will auto-populate the Login information
so you only need to enter the Password

Navigation
This is NOT a touchscreen! Due to quality, robustness, screen cleanliness, and long-term reliability
concerns Woodward chose not to implement a touchscreen directly on this product. Using the
RemoteView tool a user can take advantage of either a mouse device or a touchscreen on an external
computer, but for navigation and selection directly on the Peak200 display, buttons and an IN-Focus
highlighter indication are used.

In general, the maroon buttons provide navigation from page-to-page and throughout the components on
a page. The Navigation cross does most of the navigation.

Figure 3-5. Navigation Cross

1. Use the “Arrow” buttons to move the IN-Focus highlighter to the desired page
2. Press the “Enter” button to launch the page selected
3. Press the “ESC” (Escape) button to go back 1 page from current page
4. Press the “HOME” button to return to the main menu Note: If in Service or Configure menu a second
press of HOME will return to the Operational Home screen

Woodward 53
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 3-6. Service Menu showing “Speed Control” IN-Focus

Page Organization
Three primary menu lists organize the access to all of the information that is available on the display.
These menu lists are available at all times. The user simply uses the navigation cross to focus on the
desired page and presses Enter, or uses the Black ‘soft keys’ (no Focus needed).

Run/Operation menus: The HOME page contains the Run/Operation menus and automatically updates
to match the configuration of the control.

Service menus: The Service ‘HOME’ page contains navigation buttons to all of the service related
parameters and special feature of the control and it too is automatically updated to match the
configuration of the

Configuration menus: The Configuration ‘HOME’ page contains navigation buttons to all features and
options of the Peak200. When the unit is in Configure Mode (IOLOCK) the background of all pages will be
a blue gradient as shown below, in addition to the status in the upper right.

Figure 3-7. Configuration Menu – Operation Mode (View only)

Woodward 54
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 3-8. Configuration Menu – Configuration Mode (Edit)

Refer to chapter 1 for more details about all of the keys – below are some general reminders about the
keypad functions

Green keys – initiate operational commands

Red keys - navigate or enter values via the alphanumeric keys

Black keys – are software dependent and may do either, they never require ‘IN-Focus’ the
command shown in above the key is always available

Start Key – defaulted to issue a Start command, but can be configured to require a Confirmation.
User must be logged-in at appropriate User level (Operator or greater)

TRIP is always available in all modes and logins.

When entering string text from the keypad, holding down the key will make it slowly cycle through
the characters available on that key. Releasing the key will select the character shown at that time.

Start Modes
Turbine start-up is accomplished by controlling the inlet steam with the turbine’s Trip & Throttle valve
and/or the Actuator/Valve. The sequence of operation for these two devices determines the start mode to
be selected.

In the Peak200, there are two start options:


Configuration Menu / Turbine Start
MANUAL START
AUTOMATIC START

Either start mode begins with the START command from the START button, the START discrete input, or
a Modbus START command. (All TRIPS must be cleared and RESET for the Peak200 to respond to the
START command).

For either of these modes the HOME/STARTUP CURVE menu is the ideal screen to monitor while
starting the turbine. Initially the user may need to also use the Speed Control menu to adjust the control
dynamic settings.

Woodward 55
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 3-9. Startup Curve Screen

Manual Start Mode


With a manual start, speed control of the Peak200 begins at Minimum Governor Speed setpoint, there will
be no critical speed avoidance, and the Idle/MinGov command functionality cannot be used.

When a Start command is given the Peak200 will ramp the speed setpoint up to Minimum Governor and
the Valve Limiter will ramp the valve open to Maximum Valve Demand (default = 100%). It will wait for the
turbine speed to reach this point and then it will automatically take over speed control of the inlet steam
valve (HP Valve).

The MANUAL START MODE is when a turbine operator manually controls the inlet steam by opening the
TRIP & THROTTLE VALVE. The operator has control of the turbine speed from zero RPM to the MIN
GOVERNOR SPEED.

Auto Start Mode


With automatic start mode, speed control begins at idle speed, which is a setpoint lower than Minimum
Governor Speed. In many cases, idle speed is a setpoint at which the turbine can be warmed-up. With
this mode, a critical speed range (between Idle and Minimum Governor Speeds) can be programmed.
The operator also has flexibility to allow the Peak200 to control the speed within this range, rather than
manually controlling it with the T&T valve.

When a Start command is given the Peak200 will ramp the speed setpoint up to Idle and the Valve
Limiter will ramp the valve open to Maximum Valve Demand (default = 100%). It will wait for the turbine
speed to reach this point and then it will automatically take over speed control of the inlet steam valve
(HP Valve).

To automatically start the unit to MIN GOV:


 Close the IDLE / MIN GOV input.
 Press the START button on the front pane

This ramp will accelerate the turbine at the IDLE / MIN GOV RATE

Woodward 56
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Maximum Valve Demand During a Start


With either mode a protection feature is available that will limit the Maximum demand position of the valve
limiter ramp until the turbine is in closed loop speed control. Once the turbine is safely in speed control,
the limiter will automatically continue on to the maximum setting of the valve limiter (usually 100%)

To enable this feature:

Service / Valve Demand –


 Use HP Start Limiter?
 HP Max Limiter at Start (%)

Example: If the unit typically reaches Idle Speed at HP demand of 12%, when enabling this feature and
the limit during start value set to 15%. This way as the operator manually brings the unit up on the T& T
valve, the governor valve (HP) will be held at a safer limit until speed comes into control at IDLE speed.
For initial warm-up of a cold turbine prior to starting, this feature can be disabled (using the checkbox) to
allow the HP valve to go to 100%.

Operating Mode (Setting Turbine Speed)


The primary function of the control is as a speed control. The speed setpoint can be adjusted in a variety
of ways – for simplicity they are grouped into three modes.
 Manually Adjusting Speed Setpoint
 Remote Speed Setpoint Control via an Analog Input (4-20mA)
 Process/Cascade Controller controls the speed setpoint

Manual Speed Setpoint Adjustments


The turbine operator can adjust the speed setpoint by any of the following commands:
 The RAISE / LOWER buttons on the front panel (when setpoint adjustment component is in-focus)
 The RAISE SPEED / LOWER SPEED discrete inputs
 Entering a value and Go To command directly on the front panel
 The Modbus RAISE SPEED / LOWER SPEED commands
 Entering a speed setpoint value directly via Modbus

These options are available at all time and the speed control will follow the last of these commands.
Commanding Raise and Lower at the same time will result in the setpoint lowering.

To use Modbus commands (analog or discrete raise/lower commands) to modulate the speed setpoint,
the user must configure Modbus to be used, have a valid communication connection, and have Writes
Enabled for that Modbus link.

Remote Speed Setpoint Control Mode


When the Remote Speed Setpoint is enabled, the control will exclusively follow the remote speed setpoint
and ignore any of the manual speed adjustments commands above. The turbine speed can only be
adjusted between the MIN GOVERNOR SPEED and the MAX GOVERNOR SPEED setpoints with the
REMOTE SPEED SET input of a 4–20 mA Analog input. This can be from any source but should always
have the range set so that 4 mA is equal to the minimum governor speed setting. The 20 mA value can
be maximum governor or any speed lower than that.

This mode is active only when the turbine speed is at or above MIN GOVERNOR SPEED, and the remote
speed setpoint has been enabled. The enable or disable command for this mode can be done from a
contact input, the front panel display, RemoteView, or via Modbus. Whenever remote speed setpoint is
enabled the control will ramp from the current setpoint to the remote speed setpoint at the REMOTE
SPEED NOT MATCHED RATE (set in Configuration), once it reaches the remote setpoint it will then
follow this commanded value at the REMOTE SPEED MAX RATE. Whenever remote speed setpoint is
enabled and in control, the manual setpoint ramp will always track the remote speed setpoint to insure
that any transition of disabling the remote setpoint is bumpless.

Woodward 57
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


If a contact input is configured to enable this function, it is defaulted as a ‘toggle switch’ type of input and
the remote speed setpoint will be enabled or disabled based upon the state of this contact only. This
allows the control to respond exclusively to this command and no others, which produces these two
responses:

 The contact input can be held TRUE to have the control automatically switch to using the remote
speed setpoint as soon as MinGov speed is reached.
 If while the contact input is held TRUE and the analog input fails, the control will automatically re-
enable using the remote speed setpoint as soon as the analog input signal is repaired and reset.
(Caution – users need to consider their plant operation to consider whether this action is desirable or
undesirable).

This contact input can be optionally configured as a ‘momentary switch’ type of input where
enable/disable state is determined by the transition of this input or a command from another source, such
as from Modbus or from the front panel display. Using this option allows the contact input to act the same
as the other ways in which this function can be enabled or disabled (from front panel, or remote view, or
Modbus), giving more flexibility to turning this mode on or off.

Peak150 Combination Mode & Set Back functions


The previous model Peak control (Peak150) had an operational mode called Combination mode that
directed the control to use the highest selected signal (HSS) of the speed reference setpoint ramp and
the analog input remote speed setpoint. There was also a service function called Set Point Set Back that
would instantly set the speed setpoint to the actual running speed.

It was decided to not implement these functions in the Peak200, since the user can now always see both
the speed and the speed setpoint. The user can also see if the remote speed is enabled or disabled.
These functions existed in the Peak150 partially because the user at the panel could not see the speed
setpoint. The above modes of speed setpoint control are much more in line with the industry standards
and eliminate confusion – with the Peak200, the user can always see the speed and source of the speed
setpoint.

Process/Cascade Control
The Process/Cascade control can be configured to control any system process, related to, or affected by
turbine speed or load. Typically, this controller is configured and used as a turbine inlet, or exhaust
pressure controller or a pump discharge pressure controller.

Process/Cascade control is a PID controller that is cascaded with the Speed PID. The Cascade PID
compares a 4–20 mA process signal with an internal set point to directly position the speed set point, thus
changing turbine speed or load until the process signal and set point match. By Cascading two PIDs in
this fashion, a bumpless transfer between the two controlling parameters can be performed.

When enabled, the Cascade PID can move the speed set point at a variable rate up to the ‘Max Speed
Set Point Rate’ setting (programmed under the CASCADE CONTROL header).

Woodward 58
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 3-10. Cascade Functional Diagram

Since Cascade is a secondary speed setting function, the Speed PID must be in control of the Peak200’s
LSS bus in order for Cascade to take control.

To use this controller an analog input channel must be configured for use as the Process/Cascade input.
The Peak 200 will use this input as the Process Variable (PV) for this controller. If at any time while in
Cascade control this PV faults, the Cascade controller will be disabled and the speed setpoint will remain
at its current setpoint (bumpless).

Cascade control may be enabled and disabled from the front panel keypad, a contact input, or Modbus
communications. The last command given from any of these three sources dictates the Cascade PID’s
control state.

If a contact input is programmed to function as a Process/Cascade Enable contact, when the contact is
open Cascade control is disabled, and when it is closed Cascade control is enabled. This contact can
either be open or closed when a trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open, it must be closed to
enable Cascade control. If the contact is closed, it must be opened and re-closed to enable Cascade
control.
Table 3-1. Cascade Control Status Messages

Cascade is Disabled: Cascade control is not enabled and will have no effect.
Cascade is Enabled: Cascade has been enabled but is not active or in control. Permissives
have not been met (i.e. speed < min gov).
Casc Active/Not Spd Ctl: Cascade has been enabled but the Speed PID is not in control of the LSS
bus (i.e. valve limiter is in control).
Cascade is In Control: Cascade is in control of the LSS bus.
Casc Active w/Rmt Cascade has been enabled and the Remote Cascade set point is in
Setpt: control of the set point but the Speed PID is not in control of the LSS bus.
Casc Control w/Rmt Cascade is in control of the LSS bus (via the Speed PID) and the Remote
Setpt: Cascade Set Point is positioning the Cascade set point.
Cascade is Inhibited: Cascade cannot be enabled; the Cascade input signal has failed, the unit
is shut down, or cascade control is not programmed.

Woodward 59
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Cascade control is automatically disabled on a shutdown condition and must be re-enabled after a
successful system start-up. Cascade control is disabled if Remote Speed Set Point is used and enabled.
Should another parameter on the LSS bus take control of governor valve position from the Speed PID,
Cascade control will stay active, and begin controlling again, when the Speed PID is the lowest parameter
on the LSS bus again.

All pertinent cascade control parameters are available through the Modbus links; refer to Chapter 6 for a
complete listing of Modbus parameters.

Cascade Dynamics
The Cascade PID control uses its own set of dynamic settings. These values are programmable and may
be tuned at any time. Refer to the PID Dynamic Adjustments section in this manual.

Cascade Set Point


The Cascade set point can be adjusted from the front panel keypad, external contacts, Modbus
commands, or through a 4–20 mA analog input. A specific setting can also be directly entered from the
front panel keypad or through Modbus commands.

The Cascade set point range must be defined in the program mode. Program settings ‘Min Cascade Set
Point’ and ‘Max Cascade Set Point’ define the range of the Cascade set point and control.

If it is desired to have the Speed raise/lower contact inputs to act as


Cascade set point raise/lower contact inputs act when Cascade is
enabled or in control, then select the Speed/Cascade function when
defining the discrete input channels to be used. This allows a single
set of contacts (one SPDT switch) to control the Speed set point
when in speed control, and the Cascade set point when it is enabled.
Alternatively, a second set of contacts (speed raise and lower) could
be used to independently control the speed setpoint.

When a raise or lower Cascade Set Point command is issued, the set point moves at the programmed
‘Casc Setpt Rate’ setting. If a Cascade raise or lower command is selected for longer than three seconds,
the Cascade set point will move at the fast rate which is three times the cascade set point rate. The
Cascade set point rate, fast rate delay, and fast rate can all be adjusted in the Service mode.

The shortest length of time a set point will move for an accepted raise or lower command is 40
milliseconds (120 milliseconds for a Modbus command). If the Cascade set point slow rate is
programmed for 10 psi/s, the smallest increment it will move is 0.4 psi (1.2 psi for Modbus).

When a valid set point value is entered, the set point will ramp at the Cascade Set Point Rate to the newly
entered set point value. This ‘Entered’ rate is tunable through the Service mode.

To “enter” a specific set point from the front panel Display, use the following steps:

1. From the HOME page go to the Cascade Control page


2. Press the Commands button until ‘Entered Setpoint’ appears
3. Select ‘Entered Setpoint’ and a pop-up will appear
4. Press Enter from the Navigation cross and the pop-up value will highlight
5. Adjust the value with the Adjust keys or enter a value from the keypad
6. Press Enter again when desired value has been entered
7. The value in the pop-up will be accepted if it is valid, if it is out of range then an error message will
appear stating the entered value is invalid
8. Select the GO button to ramp the setpoint to this entered value

Woodward 60
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Cascade Set Point Tracking


To allow a bumpless transfer from turbine Speed/load control to Cascade control, the Cascade PID can
be programmed to track its controlling process input when disabled. When this tracking feature is
programmed, the Cascade PID will be satisfied when enabled, and no turbine speed or load correction
will be performed. After the Cascade control is enabled, its set point can moved, as required, to another
setting.

Cascade Set Point with No Tracking


If the Cascade control is programmed not to use the set point tracking feature the set point will remain at
its last setting (running or shutdown). When the Peak200 is powered-up the set point is reset to the
Minimum Cascade Setpoint. With this configuration, when Cascade control is enabled, and its sensed
process signal does not match set point, the Cascade control will ramp turbine speed/load up or down to
match the two signals, at a controlled “not-matched” rate (defaulted to the ‘Speed Set Point Slow Rate’
setting, and tunable through the Service mode).

If Cascade is the controlling parameter and one of the permissives is lost or Cascade is disabled, the
speed set point will remain at its last setting until another parameter adjusts it.

Cascade Droop
When sharing control of a parameter with another external controller, the Cascade PID can also receive a
programmable DROOP feedback signal for control loop stability. This feedback signal is a percentage of
the Cascade PID’s output. By including this second parameter into the control loop, the Cascade PID
becomes satisfied, and does not fight with the other external controller over the shared parameter. If
Cascade droop is used, the Cascade input signal will not match the Cascade set point when in control.
The difference will depend on the amount (%) of droop programmed and the output of the Cascade PID.
The Droop value fed back to the Cascade PID is equal to the following defaulted settings:

PID OUTPUT % x ‘CASCADE DROOP %’ x ‘MAX CASC SET POINT’ x 0.0001

Where the ‘CASCADE DROOP %’ and ‘MAX CASC SET POINT’ values are set in the Program
Mode and the ‘PID output %’ is determined by the Cascade demand.

Example: 25% x 5% x 600 psi x 0.0001 = 7.5 psi

Invert Cascade
Depending on the control action required, the Cascade input signal can be inverted. If a decrease in inlet
governor valve position is required to increase the Cascade process signal, program the ‘INVERT
CASCADE INPUT’ setting to ‘YES’. Example of this required control action: when the Cascade PID is
configured to control turbine inlet steam pressure. To increase turbine inlet steam pressure, the inlet
control valve position must be decreased.

Remote Cascade Set Point


If desired, the Cascade set point can be positioned through an analog signal. Optionally, one of the
control’s six analog inputs can be programmed to position the Cascade PID set point. This allows the
Cascade set point to be positioned remotely by a process control or distributed plant control system.

The programmed Analog input’s 4 mA and 20 mA settings determine the Remote Cascade Set Point
(RCS) range. The Remote Cascade Set Point range is tunable in the Service mode, but cannot be set
outside of the min and max Cascade Set Point settings.

The Remote Cascade Set Point input may be enabled from the front panel keypad, contact input, or
Modbus communications. The last command given from any of these three sources dictates
enable/disable.

Woodward 61
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


If the milliamp signal to the Remote Cascade set point input is out of range, (below 2 mA or above 22 mA)
an alarm will occur and the Remote Cascade set point will be inhibited until the input signal is corrected
and the alarm is cleared. Depending on configuration and system conditions, the Remote Cascade Set
Point may be in one of the following states (front panel screen messages):
 Disabled—The Remote Set Point function is not enabled and will have no effect on the Cascade set
point.
 Enabled—The Remote Set Point has been enabled but cascade control is not active. The breakers
are not closed, speed < min gov, or cascade has not taken control.
 Active—The Remote Set Point has been enabled but Cascade is not in control. Cascade has been
enabled and the Remote Cascade set point is in control of the set point but the Speed PID is not in
control of the LSS bus.
 In Control—Cascade is in control of the LSS bus (via the Speed PID) and the Remote Cascade Set
Point is positioning the Cascade set point.
 Inhibited—Remote Set Point cannot be enabled; input signal is failed, Cascade input signal is failed,
a controlled stop is selected, the unit is shut down, or the remote cascade control is not
programmed.

When enabled, the Remote Cascade set point may not match the Cascade set point. In this case, the
Cascade set point will ramp to the Remote Cascade set point at the programmed ‘Casc Setpt Rate’
setting (as defaulted in the Service mode). Once in control, the fastest the Remote Cascade set point will
adjust the Cascade set point is at the programmed ‘Rmt Cascade Max Rate’ setting. If the ‘Rmt Cascade
Max Rate’ was set at 10 and the Remote Cascade set point analog input instantly moved from 0 units to
1000 units, the Remote Cascade set point will move to 1000 units at 10 units/s).

Remote Cascade Enable Logic


There are three different options for enabling Remote Cascade Set Point and Cascade control as follows:
 Remote Cascade Setpoint Enable contact input
 Enable command from Modbus
 Enable command from the front panel display

If a contact input is programmed to enable and disable the Remote Cascade Set Point (RCS)
input/function and no contact input is programmed for Enable Cascade Control, then this one contact will
enable both remote setpoint and cascade control. When this contact is open both Cascade control and
the RCS is disabled, and when it is closed, both the Cascade control and the RCS are enabled. The
contact can be either open or closed when a trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be
closed to enable the functions. If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to enable the
cascade functions.

When both Remote Cascade Enable and Cascade Control Enable commands are programmed, each
function is enabled by its respective command selection. If Remote Cascade Enable is selected, only the
Remote Cascade Set Point will be enabled. If Cascade Control Enable is selected, only Cascade control
will be enabled. If Remote Cascade Disable is selected, only the Remote Cascade Set Point will be
disabled. If Cascade Control Disable is selected, both Remote Cascade control and Cascade control will
be disabled. However, if before the Cascade PID was ‘In-control’, a Cascade disabled command is given,
only Cascade control will be disabled.

If no external contact input or function keys are programmed for the ‘Enable’ commands, Cascade
Control and Remote Cascade Control must be enabled either from the front panel keypad or from
Modbus. Since the front panel and Modbus provide both Remote Cascade Enable and Cascade Control
Enable commands, they will operate in the same manner as ‘both enables programmed’.

Woodward 62
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 4.
Configuration Procedures

Program Architecture
The Peak200 is easy to Configure from the built-in graphical user interface (GUI). When the control is
powered up and after the CPU self-test has been completed, the control displays the home screen and
the CPU LED on the left side of the front panel should be green. At this point the configuration can be
done locally on the display or remotely using the RemoteView tool on a user PC.

Using the remote tool may be more convenient as you can use a mouse
to navigate and the full keyboard to enter data. Refer to the appropriate
appendix in this manual for installing and using RemoteView.
Configuration from
Display or PC

The operating procedures are divided into two sections: the Configuration Mode, discussed in this
chapter, and the Run Modes (Operation and Calibration) (refer to Chapter 5 for RUN Mode information).
The Configure Mode is used Configures the Peak200 for the specific application and set all operating
parameters. The Run Mode is the normal turbine operation mode and is used to view operating
parameters and run the turbine.

The configuration cannot be changed or altered while the turbine is running, however, it can be accessed
and all programmed values monitored. This minimizes the possibility of introducing step disturbances into
the system. To monitor or review the program while in the run mode, enter the Configuration menu from
the first (leftmost) soft key on the Home screen.

Display Modes and User Levels


The Peak200 Display operates in several modes and access user levels, each of which has a different
purpose. The modes are:
 Operation
 Calibration
 Configuration

In order to enter and exit a particular mode, the user must be logged in with an appropriate user level.
These user levels are:
 Monitor
 Operator
 Service
 Configure

In addition to granting authority to enter and exit modes, user levels also determine what parameters the
user is authorized to adjust. See Table 4-1, Mode Access by User Level.

Woodward 63
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 4-1. Mode Access by User Level

Mode
Operation Calibration Configuration
Monitor
User Operator X
Level Service X X
Configure X X X

Mode Descriptions
The OPERATION mode is the only mode that can be used to run the turbine. This is the default mode.
Exiting CALIBRATION or CONFIGURATION mode will return to OPERATION mode. User levels are:
 Operator
 Service
 Configure.

The CALIBRATION mode is used to force signal outputs in order to calibrate signals and field devices. In
this mode, the actuator, analog, and relay outputs can be manually controlled. To enter this mode the
turbine speed must be shutdown with no speed detected. User levels: Service or Configure.

The CONFIGURE mode is used to set up the parameters for a specific application prior to operation of
the unit. To enter this mode the turbine speed must be shutdown with no speed detected. When the unit
enters CONFIGURE mode the control is placed in IOLOCK which will disable all Output channels. If the
control is not shutdown, navigating through the configuration pages will allow viewing of CONFIGURE,
but will not permit any changes to be made.

User Level Descriptions


The Peak200 control system requires a password to be entered before access can be given to any of the
modes above. These passwords are intended to help prevent unauthorized or untrained personnel from
accessing these modes and possibly making changes that could cause damage to the turbine or
associated process. The passwords for each of these modes is found in Chapter 8 (Troubleshooting).

To enter the login or password on the front panel display:


Navigate so the Login or Password field is highlighted (in-focus)
Press Enter on the Navigation Cross
Use the keypad to enter the text field (hold key down to scroll options)
Press Enter on the Navigation Cross – to accept your entry

The Monitor user level is view-only access. All commands from the front panel are inhibited. All values
displayed on each screen are continuously updated.

The Operator user level allows for control of the turbine. Front panel commands to start, change
setpoints, enable/disable functions, and stop the turbine are accepted.

The Service user level allows the same commands as the Operator user level plus tuning of Service
menu parameters and issuing of additional commands.

The Configure user level allows the same commands and access as the Service user level plus tuning of
Configuration menu parameters.

Woodward 64
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Configuring the Peak200


Before the Peak200 can be used to operate any turbine, it must be configured with a valid configuration.
A Peak200 Configure Mode Worksheet is provided in Appendix A of this manual. This chapter contains
additional information related to completing this worksheet and configuring the specific application.
Recommend this worksheet be completed and used to document your specific configuration.

It is also possible to configure a unit by loading the configuration (tunable) file from another unit. This is
the recommended method for configuring a spare unit. Refer to the appropriate appendix in this manual
for installing and using the Control Assistant service tool. It will describe how to retrieve and send these
files to and from the control.

Figure 4-1 illustrates the Peak200 screen displayed when power is first applied, and the unit is not
configured. This is the HOME screen. It includes tips on how to enter the Configure Mode from this point.
A password is required to protect against both intentional and inadvertent configuration changes. The
password can be changed if desired, refer to the AppManager appendix for information on changing
passwords. This screen will become the main menu once the unit is configured. From this HOME screen,
operational screens as well as the Service and Configure menus can be accessed.

Figure 4-1. Initial HOME Screen (unit not configured)

Use the following procedure to begin configuring the Peak200:


1. Press the MODE key.
2. Press the LOGIN softkey to open the User Login popup.
3. Login to ‘Configure’ user level.
4. Close the User Login popup screen.
5. Press the Configuration softkey to enter configuration mode. Verify that the following Calibration and
Configuration Mode Permissives are met:
a. Unit Shutdown
b. No Speed Detected
c. “Configure” User Level or greater is logged in
6. Press MODE or HOME to return to the HOME screen.
7. Press the Configuration softkey to access the configuration menus.
8. Use the navigation cross to navigate up/down/left/right and use ENTER to select a menu or item.

Woodward 65
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


The Peak200 configure mode may be accessed if the unit is in a Shutdown state, no speed is detected,
and the correct user level is logged in (Configure or higher). For safety reasons the configuration may be
monitored only and no changes will be accepted if the turbine is running.

All configuration values and saved service mode changes are stored as a file on the Peak200 control. To
ensure that values are saved, exit Configure mode or select ‘Save Settings’ from the MODE screen. If
power is removed from the Peak200, all saved values will return once power is restored. No batteries or
back up power is required.

The field-configured portion of the configuration settings will be


zeroed out after factory repair. You must reconfigure these values
before the unit is put back into service.

Using Configure Menus


Once the Configure Mode has been entered with the password, the specific application information must
be entered into the Peak200. To access the configure menu, select the ‘Configuration’ softkey from the
HOME screen.

The navigation arrow keys (red navigation cross keypad; up, down, left, and right) are used for navigation
of the Configure menus. Press ENTER to go into a menu. Then use the navigation cross to move up or
down (left/right, if needed) in the menu. In the Configuration mode, the control will generate an error
message shown on the Configuration menu home screen as well as the MODE screen if an invalid
configuration exits. A configuration error will cause the control to remain tripped. It is possible to exit
Configuration mode with such an error, but the control will be tripped until the Configuration mode is
entered again and the Configuration error is corrected.

See the Tutorial to learn how to adjust a value. The tutorial can be accessed from the HOME
screen by pressing the Tutorial softkey before the unit is configured or from the Service menu any
time.

To return to the previous screen, press the ESC key. While in a Configure menu, to return to the main
Configure menu screen, press the HOME key. To return to the main Home screen, press the HOME key
again. To exit the Configure mode, go to the MODE screen and select the ‘Exit Configuration’ soft key.
This will save values, exit I/O Lock, and reboots the Peak200.

Woodward 66
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Configuration Menus
To program the control, navigate through the menus and configure the control features for the desired
application. The first four configure menus listed below, as well as drivers and other I/O, must be
programmed for every installation. The remaining menus contain optional features which can be selected
if desired. The configure menus and their basic functions are described below.

Figure 4-2. Configuration Menu – Configuration Mode (Edit) with Error

Table 4-2. Configuration Menus and Their Basic Functions

Turbine Start: Configures start mode, idle/MinGov, and auto start sequence settings
Speed Signals: Configures MPU information
Speed Setpoints Configures speed set points, overspeed trip set point, remote speed setting
control and critical speed avoidance band
Communications: Configures port settings and Modbus communication options
Process/Cascade: Configures the process/cascade controller, speed setpoint authority range, and
remote cascade setpoint

Analog Inputs: Configures analog input options


Analog Outputs: Configures analog readout options
Drivers: Configures driver output
Contact Inputs: Configures contact input options
Relays: Configures relay options
LinkNet Nodes: Configures additional distributed I/O

The configure menus are described in detail below and contain information detailing each question and/or
Peak200 configuration option. Each question/option shows the default (dflt) value and the adjustable
range of that parameter (shown in parentheses).

Note: For users that are familiar with the Peak 150 hand-held programmer – the following table is a
quick reference to where those parameters are found in the Peak200 configuration menu above.

Woodward 67
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 4-3. Peak150 to Peak200 Configuration Parameter locations

Peak 150 Configure Header Peak200 Configure Header


C1 Speed Signals Speed Signals
C2 Start Mode Turbine Start
C3 Actuator Type Drivers
C4 Operating Mode Speed Setpoints
C5 Readout Configurations Analog Outputs
C6 Relay Configurations Relays
C7 Choice for DI 8 usage Contact Inputs
C8 Serial Communication Port Settings Communications

Turbine Start Menu


This menu shows the starting modes.
Start Mode: (Select only 1)

 MANUAL START
(Select this radio button to choose MANUAL START MODE – Speed control will begin when the unit
reaches Minimum Governor Speed)
 AUTOMATIC START _____
(Select this radio button to choose the AUTO START MODE – Speed control will begin when the unit
reaches Idle Speed)

In Manual Start Mode, governor speed control starts at minimum


governor speed. In Automatic Start Mode, speed control starts at idle
speed which is much lower than minimum governor speed (see Start
Modes in Operating Procedures chapter).

Valve Limiter Raise/Lower Rate (%/sec) _________


Rate at which the valve limiter will ramp open during start

Start Sequence: (LED status - determined by Start Mode chosen)


 No Start Sequence
 Idle/MinGov Sequence (This mode allows ramping of the turbine between Idle speed and the
Minimum Governor speed.)

Use Confirmation on Keypad Start? _________


If selected, when the Start button on the keypad is pressed the user will get a dialog box to confirm the
action. This will only apply to the front panel and the remote view, not Modbus or a discrete input start
command.

Idle/MinGov Settings:

Idle Speed Setpoint (rpm) _________


Speed setpoint for Idle
Minimum Governor Speed Setpoint (rpm) _________
Speed setpoint for Minimum Governor Speed
Rate to MinGov (rpm/sec) _________
Rate at which the setpoint will ramp between Idle and MinGov
Use Ramp to Idle? _________
If selected will allow operator to ramp back to Idle from MinGov. If unselected the unit will not accept
a command to return to Idle speed – the operator can still manually take control of the setpoint and return
to Idle speed

Woodward 68
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Speed Signals Menu


This menu is used to set the parameters for the MPU inputs and for scaling the minimum and maximum
signal of the MPUs.

To control the speed of a turbine, an MPU senses the speed in Hz (cycles per second). In the Peak200,
the MPU speed signal is converted from Hz to RPM. The values of the turbine’s operating speeds are set
in RPM.

On many turbines (as in Case 1), the MPU gear is mounted on the main turbine shaft so that the speed of
the MPU gear is the same as the speed of the turbine. On other turbines (as in Case 2), the MPU gear is
mounted on an auxiliary shaft so that the speed of MPU gear is different from the speed of the turbine. In
Case 2, the RPM displayed and controlled by the Peak200 is a function of the number of teeth, the speed
of the shaft and the ratio between the main turbine shaft and the MPU gear shaft.

Before running the turbine, ensure that the correct RATIO between
the MPU gear speed and the turbine speed is entered correctly.
Failure to set the correct RATIO could result in personal injury, loss
of life, or property damage.

CASE1: Turbine speed and MPU gear speed are same:


Equation 1:

MPU (Hz)

For example: with RPM = 3600 RPM


Teeth = 120:

MPU (Hz) = 7200 Hz

or

Equation 2:

RPM

For example: With MPU (Hz) = 3600 Hz


Teeth = 60

RPM = 3600 RPM

Case 2: Turbine speed and MPU gear speed are different:


The Gear Ratio is the number of revolutions made by the magnetic pickup gear divided by the number of
revolutions of the turbine. For example, if the turbine revolves twice for every revolution of the MPU gear
then enter 0.5 for the Gear Ratio. The following is the equation for calculating the MPU Gear Ratio 1:

Equation 3:
"MPU GEAR RATIO 1" X

For example: With Turbine speed = 4500 RPM


MPU Gear = 3000 RPM

3000 RPM
"MPU GEAR RATIO 1" 0.66667
4500 RPM

Woodward 69
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


The equation for calculating turbine RPM is:

Equation 4:

RPM * “MPU GEAR RATIO 1”

For example: With: MPU (Hz) = 3600 Hz


Teeth = 60.
MPU Gear Ratio 1 = 0.6667.

RPM = 5400 RPM
∗ .

The equation for calculating MPU HZ is:

Equation 5:
∗ ∗
MPU (Hz)

For example: With Turbine RPM = 3600 RPM


Teeth = 72
MPU Gear Ratio 1 = 2
∗ ∗
MPU (Hz) = 8640 Hz

The following parameters are set in the Speed Signal Menu:

 Device Tag ______________


User text string available to identify the signal
 Number of Gear Teeth ______________
(Enter the number of gear teeth on the MAGNETIC PICKUP gear.)
(Tunable Range: 1 to 200.)
 Gear Ratio ______________
(Enter the ratio between the speed of the MPU gear shaft and the turbine shaft.)
(Tunable Range: 0 to 200.)
 Maximum Speed Level (rpm) ______________
(Enter the maximum speed the MPU should ever see – to the right of this a suggested value is
shown – make this value equal to or greater than value shown)
 Failed Speed Level (rpm) ______________
(Enter the lowest speed at which the MPU signal is valid – below this speed, the MPU signal is
considered to be failed. The MPU voltage should be greater than or equal to 1 Vrms at this speed.
To the right of this a suggested value is shown – make this value equal to or greater than value
shown)

Note: the suggested values displayed are calculated from the Speed Setpoints entered by the
user – once those have been entered, these suggested values will be updated.

Use Speed Input Channel 2 ____________


Check this box to enable using second MPU input – control will use the highest signal selected (HSS) of
the 2 speed inputs as the turbine speed

User will have repeat of fields shown above for the channel 2 signal

The speed range of the Peak200 needs to be scaled to optimize the resolution of the speed sensing
function. Use the following steps for calculating the preferred values:

Determine the Overspeed Test Limit for the turbine in RPM.

Using Equation 5, convert the Overspeed Test Limit to Hz.

Woodward 70
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Set the MPU #1 – MAX HERTZ equal to 1.02 * (Hz value of the Overspeed Test Limit).

With: Overspeed Test Limit = 4000 RPM


Teeth = 60
MPU Gear Ratio 1 = 1

MPU (Hz)


MPU (Hz) = 4000 Hz

MPU #1 - Max Hertz 1.02 ∗ Overspeed Test Limit Hz
= 1.02 * 4000 Hz = 4080 Hz

MPU #1 or MPU #2 — Maximum speed level will normally both be the


same value. This setting must be greater than the Overspeed test
Limit Speed (see Service Mode).

Do not set any set points greater than the value set for MPU #1 or
MPU #2 — Maximum speed level. If any speed set points exceed the
maximum frequency set by these set points, a configuration error will
result

Speed Setpoints Menu


This menu is used to configure the Speed setpoints used within the control logic.

Overspeed Test Limit (rpm) _________


Maximum limit for the Speed setpoint when performing an overspeed test

Overspeed Trip (rpm) _________


Speed setpoint at which the control will Trip on Overspeed condition

Maximum Governor Speed (rpm) _________


Maximum limit for the Speed setpoint during normal operation

Minimum Governor Speed (rpm) _________


Minimum limit for the Speed setpoint during normal operation
(This is the exact same variable that was available in the Turbine Start menu)

Underspeed Setpoint (rpm) _________


Underspeed setpoint during normal operation – if the turbine falls below this speed during normal
operation an alarm will be annunciated

Use Remote Speed Setpoint _________


If selected, and AI must be configured to be used for this signal

Remote Speed Max Rate (rpm/sec) _________


Rate at which setpoint will move when Remote speed setpoint is enabled and in control of the actual
speed setpoint

Remote Speed Not Matched Rate (rpm/sec) _________


Rate at which setpoint will move when Remote speed setpoint is initially enabled, but remote
setpoint is more than 0.5% from the current speed setpoint

Woodward 71
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Use DI Enable/Disable as Momentary _________


If selected, the discrete input will act as a momentary input and the action of enabling or disabling
the remote speed setpoint will be determined by the last command from this input, Modbus or the
Peak GUI (local or remote view). If this is not checked, enabling, and disabling of the remote speed
setpoint will be exclusively determined by the state of this input (a toggle action).

Use Critical Speed Avoidance _________


If selected, will not allow turbine speed setpoint to stay in this range – only available if Idle/MinGov
Sequence is used

Critical Speed Rate (rpm/sec) _________


Rate at which the setpoint will ramp through the critical range

Critical Speed Minimum (rpm) _________


Lower setpoint of avoidance range

Critical Speed Maximum (rpm) _________


Upper setpoint of avoidance range

Communications Menu
This menu is used to configure the Ethernet IP address of Ethernet Port 1, configure a Gateway IP, serial
port and whether or not the Modbus data communication link is used. The “Set” command button must to
used once on the values for the entire address/mask are set.

Ethernet IP Configuration
ENET 1 ADDRESS dflt= 172.16.100.15 (0, 255)
Enter the integers corresponding to the network TCP/IP address.
ENET 1 SUBNET MASK dflt= 255.255.240.0 (0, 255)
Enter the integer corresponding to the network subnet mask.
Gateway ADDRESS dflt= 0.0.0.0 (0, 255)
Enter the integers corresponding to the network TCP/IP address.

NOTE – the ENET 2 address is not changeable at the front panel. It is always available for
service tools and is defaulted to the following:
ENET 2 ADDRESS 192.168.128.20
ENET 2 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0

Use Modbus _________


Select this to enable the use of the Modbus slave communication block

Use Serial Port (Modbus Link 1)? _________


Select this to use the serial communication port for Modbus

Use Ethernet 1 Port (Modbus Link 2)? _________


Select this to use the Ethernet communications port for Modbus

If Ethernet is used -

ETHERNET PROTOCOL dflt= TCP (TCP, UDP port 5001)


Select TCP or UDP to determine the Ethernet communication protocol. Selecting UDP will use port
5001 for Link 2.
DEVICE ADDRESS dflt= 2 (1, 247)
Enter the integer corresponding to the Modbus device number/address required.
ENABLE WRITE COMMANDS dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES to allow this Modbus link to write values to the control. If NO, it will be read only.

Woodward 72
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


If Serial is used -

DEVICE ADDRESS dflt= 1 (1, 247)


Enter the integer corresponding to the Modbus device number/address required.
ENABLE WRITE COMMANDS dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES to allow this Modbus link to write values to the control. If NO, it will be read only.

PROTOCOL dflt= ASCII (ASCII, RTU)


Select ASCII or RTU to determine the format of the Modbus communications.
BAUD RATE dflt= 115,200
Select the communications baud rate.
BITS dflt= 8 (7, 8)
Select the integer corresponding to the bits required.
STOP BITS dflt= 1 (1, 2, 1.5)
Select the stop bits required.
PARITY dflt= NONE (NONE, ODD, EVEN)
Select the parity required.
DRIVER dflt= RS-232 (RS-232, RS-485)
Select the serial communications mode required. Enter RS-232, or RS-485 communications.

Process/Cascade Menu
This menu is used to configure an optional process control loop. The output of this PID control will
determine the setpoint for the speed control. In Woodward terminology, we refer to this as a ‘Cascade’
control, since its output drives the setpoint for another PID rather than controlling the valve demand
directly.

USE PROCESS/CASCADE CONTROL? dflt= NO (Yes/No)


Select YES to configure the cascade control function. Select NO if the cascade function is not used.
If select an analog input signal must be configured as Process/Cascade Input and this signal will be
the process variable for this controller. The engineering units are entered with the AI signal.
MIN CASCADE SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the minimum cascade set point. This value is the minimum set point value that the cascade set
point can be decreased/lowered to (lower limit of cascade set point).
MAX CASCADE SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-20000, 20000)
Set the maximum cascade set point. This value is the maximum set point value that the cascade set
point can be increased/raised to (upper limit of cascade set point).
(Must be greater than the ‘Min Cascade Setpt’ Setting)
CASCADE SETPOINT RATE (UNITS/s) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 1000)
Set the cascade set point rate. This value is the rate (in units per second) at which cascade set point
moves when adjusted.
USE SETPOINT TRACKING? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES or NO. If YES, the cascade set point tracks the cascade input to provide bumpless
transfer to cascade control when it is enabled. If NO, the cascade set point remains at the last
position except on power-up or exiting the program mode.
INVERTED? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box if the cascade control will be reverse acting. If not selected, the control will be forward
acting. The Cascade control drives the speed setpoint and the speed control increases the HP valve
to increase speed
Example 1 – Cascade input is the exhaust steam pressure – not inverted (forward acting) since
increasing the speed, increases the exhaust pressure
Example 2 – Cascade input is the inlet steam pressure – inverted (reverse acting) since increasing
the speed, decreases the inlet pressure (pulls in higher volume of steam from inlet header)
SPEED SETPOINT LOWER LIMIT (rpm) dflt= 0 (0.0, 20000)
Set the minimum speed set point to which the cascade controller can lower the speed set point.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Minimum Governor Speed Setpoint’ Setting)
SPEED SETPOINT UPPER LIMIT (rpm) dflt= 0 (0.0, 20000)
Set the maximum speed set point that cascade controller can raise the speed set point to.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Maximum Governor Speed Setpt’ Setting)

Woodward 73
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


MAX SPEED SETPOINT RATE (rpm/s) dflt= 20 (0.1, 100)
Set the maximum rate at which the cascade control can vary the speed set point.
CASCADE DROOP (%) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the droop percentage. If needed, typically set between 4–6%.
PID PROPORTIONAL GAIN (%) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the cascade PID proportional gain value. This value is used to set cascade control response.
This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a
recommended starting value is 1%.
PID INTEGRAL GAIN (%) dflt= 0.3 (0.001, 50.0)
Enter the cascade PID integral gain value. This value is used to set cascade control response. This
value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a recommended
starting value is 0.3%.
PID DERIVATIVE RATIO (%) dflt= 100 (0.01, 100)
Enter the cascade PID derivative ratio. This value is used to set cascade control response. This
value can be changed in the Service Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a
recommended starting value is 100%. When this value is between 0.01 and 1.0 the derivative term is
considered to be ‘input dominant’ and the derivative is equal to (Deriv Ratio)/(Integral Gain). When
this value is between 1.0 and 100 the derivative term is considered to be ‘feedback dominant’ and
the derivative is equal to 1.0/[(Deriv Ratio)*(Integral Gain)].
USE REMOTE CASCADE SETPOINT? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to allow the Cascade set point to be adjusted from an analog input.
(Must program a ‘remote cascade set point’ analog input if this is selected)
REMOTE CASCADE MAX RATE (UNITS/s) dflt= 5.0 (0.1, 1000)
Enter the maximum rate at which the remote input will move the cascade set point.
UNITS OF MEASURE (Configured with Analog Inputs)
DECIMALS DISPLAYED (Configured with Analog Inputs)

Analog Inputs Menu


No two analog inputs can be programmed for the same function. In addition, the function that the analog
input uses must be programmed, or an error message will occur. For example, to use the
Process/Cascade Input, the ‘Use Process/Cascade’ function must be programmed.

ANALOG INPUT # 1
Input Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-4. Analog Input Options

Not Used Bearing Temperature #1


Remote Speed Setpoint Bearing Temperature #2
Process/Cascade Input Bearing Temperature #3
Remote Cascade Setpoint Bearing Temperature #4
Vibration Input #1 Signal Monitoring #1
Vibration Input #2 Signal Monitoring #2
Vibration Input #3 Signal Monitoring #3
Vibration Input #4 HP Valve Feedback Position

4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 4 milliamps (mA) on the analog input.
20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 20 milliamps (mA) on the analog input.
(Must be greater than the ‘Input 4 mA Value’ Setting)
Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.

Woodward 74
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Loop Powered? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this if the control will supply the loop power for the analog input signal
(Follow the wiring guidelines in chapter 2 – signals are wired differently if Peak200 is supplying the
power)
Units
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a unit label for this channel.
Modbus Multiplier dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the Modbus multiplier that is applied to the engineering units value on this analog input.
Decimals Displayed dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the number of decimals that are shown when this value (in engineering units) appears on the
front panel display.

Analog Inputs # 2 through # 4 are configured following the same rules as described for Analog Input # 1.

Under the Channel Events screen –

Analog Input xx Signal – (for each AI channel)


Use Alarm Setpoint 1? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Level 2 Setpoint as a TRIP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Chan Flt = SD? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to initiate a TRIP if this AI signal is faulted
Channel Fault Delay (sec) dflt= 0.0 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance channel signal faults
Level 1 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 1 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action 1 alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select this to trigger the value falling below setpoint
Level 2 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 2 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action 2 alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Setpoint hysteresis (eng units) dflt= -3.0 (-100, 100)
Enter the hysteresis setting in engineering units for both alarms. A negative setting will allow the
event to occur at the programmed setpoint and stay true until the value falls below the setpoint by
this amount.
Delay for Event Action (sec) dflt= 2.0 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance events – this delay is applied to both events
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) dflt= 0.0 (0, 10000)
Enter a value here to inhibit any event from this channel until the turbine has reached this speed
Speed Hysteresis (rpm) dflt= -10.0 (-100, 100)
Enter a hysteresis value here that will be applied to the speed setpoint. This is useful if the speed
setpoint is at an Idle speed setting, where the turbine speed may be held and fluxuate around this speed.
Use Start Perm? (Feature Pack Enabled) dflt = NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to use the Analog Input as a start permissive.
Perm Setpoint (Feature Pack Enabled) dflt = 0(-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Set the value of the start permissive in engineering units.
Invert Perm (Feature Pack Enabled) dflt = NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to trigger the value falling below the setpoint.

Analog Outputs Menu


All 4–20 mA analog readouts may be configured. The function that the readout uses must be
programmed or an error message will occur. For example, to use the Process/Cascade Set Point readout,
the ‘Use Process/Cascade’ function must be programmed.

ANALOG OUTPUT # 1
Output Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Woodward 75
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 4-5. Analog Readout Options

Not Used Remote Cascade Setpoint


Actual Speed Valve Limiter Setpoint
Speed Setpoint HP Valve Demand
Remote Speed Setpoint Signal Monitoring #1
Process/Cascade Input Signal Monitoring #2
Process/Cascade Setpoint Signal Monitoring #3

4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to four milliamps (mA) on the analog output.
20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 20 milliamps (mA) on the analog output.
(Must be greater than the ‘Readout 4 mA Value’ Setting)
Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Units
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a unit label for this channel.
Enable Readback Fault? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select this to issue an alarm when a fault is detected on this output. If YES, the control will issue an
alarm if the analog channel has a fault. If NO, no fault alarm will be issued. A fault will be determined
if the current drops below the failure level or if the difference between the current detected on the
source and return wires of the circuit is greater than approximately 5%.

Analog Outputs # 2 and # 3 are configured following the same rules as described for Analog Output # 1.

Drivers Menu
This menu is used to configure the actuator channel.

mA at 0% Demand dflt= 4.0 (0, 25 or -10, 220)


Set the value (in milliamps) that corresponds to the HP Valve being fully closed (0% demand).
mA at 100% Demand dflt= 20 (0, 25 or -10, 220)
Set the value (in milliamps) that corresponds to the HP Valve being fully open (100% demand).
(Must be greater than the ‘mA at 0% demand’ Setting)
Actuator Function dflt= HP Demand
Currently the only option of this channel is the HP valve demand
Actuator Range dflt= 4-20 mA (4-20, 0-200)
Select the actuator channel output current range. Select 4–20 mA or 0–200 mA. The range can be
adjusted via calibration, for example, for a 20-160 mA actuator select the 0-200 mA range.
Dither (mA) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 10)
Enter the dither mA for the actuator channel. Enter 0.0 if no dither is required. Woodward TM-type
actuators typically require dither.
Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Use Actuator Fault Shutdown ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES to issue a trip whenever an actuator fault is detected. If YES, the control will issue a
shutdown if Actuator 1 has a fault. If NO, an actuator fault alarm will be issued when a fault is
detected. An actuator fault will be determined if the current drops below or goes above the failure
levels, basically checking for an open or a short circuit in the actuator wires/coil.
Invert Actuator Output ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to invert actuator driver output. This is normally set to NO.
When Set to YES, the actuator output will go to Max mA at shutdown.

Sub-Menu – Powered Act

Idle/MinGov Start Sequence Used <LED status>


The Idle/MinGov start sequence must be configured and this LED must be on to enable using a self-
powered actuator. This ensures that the Peak200 will have control of the turbine speed at Idle, prior
to the unit reaching the normal operating range.

Woodward 76
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Use Self-Powered Actuator? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select this if using a self-powered actuator that needs to be fully open to allow starting of the turbine
this is normally set to NO.
When Set to YES, the actuator output will go to Max mA at shutdown, after the time delay configured
below
MPU Override to this % of Idle or MinGov Speed dflt= 20.0 (1.0, 100)
When a self-powered actuator is used, the MPU override will be active until the turbine reaches this
percent of minimum speed
Self-Powered Time Delay (sec) dflt= 60.0 (5.0, 50000)
When a self-powered actuator is used, the MPU override will be active until the turbine reaches this
percent of minimum speed

Contact Inputs Menu


Each contact input option may be configured only once. In addition, the function that the contact input
uses must be programmed, or an error message will occur. For example, to use the Process/Cascade
Control Enable contact input, the ‘Use Process/Cascade’ function must be programmed.
Contact Input #3 is a dedicated External Trip – same as the Peak 150

CONTACT INPUT 01-08


Input Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-6. Contact Input Options

Not Used Process/Casc Control Enable


Lower Speed Command Rmt Cascade Setpoint Enable
Raise Speed Command External Trip 2
External Trip 1 External Trip 3
Start/External Run External Trip 4
Idle/MinGov Command External Alarm 1
Remote Speed Setpoint Enable External Alarm 2
Select On-Line Dynamics External Alarm 3
Overspeed Test Valve Limiter Open
Raise Process/Casc Setpoint Valve Limiter Close
Lower Process/Casc Setpoint Clock Sync Pulse

Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Invert Logic? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to invert the active state of the input

Relays Menu
You may configure up to three relays in addition to the one pre-assigned relay #1 (Shutdown). Each relay
can be configured as either a level switch or as an indication. An example of a level switch is a Speed
Switch and an example of an indication is Process/Cascade Control Enabled.

Relay Output 01
Relay Output Function Trip Relay
This channel is a dedicated trip output.
Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Invert Logic? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to invert the active state of the relay
Reset Clears TRIP Output? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to allow the Trip relay state to clear while the RESET input is held True

Woodward 77
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Include External Trips in Relay? dflt= Yes (Yes/No)
Check this box to include the External Trips (DI #3 and any others) in the state of the Relay output. If
this is unchecked, External trips will trip the Peak200, but not affect the state of Relay #1
Trip will set ACT to 0 mA? dflt= Yes (Yes/No)
Check this box to have any Trip condition drive the Actuator Output signal to 0 mA (zero current). If
unchecked, then a Trip will send 0% demand (minimum current) to the Actuator Output

Relay Output 02

Relay Output / Level Switch Function (must choose from list)


Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-7. Options for Relays ff Used to Indicate State

Not Used Overspeed Test Enabled


Shutdown Summary Underspeed Switch
Alarm Summary Cascade PID Control Enabled
Reset Pulse (2 sec) Cascade PID Control Active
Speed PID in Control Process/Cascade PID in Control
Remote Speed Setpoint Enabled Remote Casc Setpoint Enabled
Remote Speed Setpoint Active Remote Casc Setpoint Active
Overspeed Trip HP Valve Limiter in Control
Repeat of Trip Relay On-Line Speed PID Dynamics
Unit Started Pulse (2 sec)

Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Invert Logic? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use to invert the normal status of the relay. Note that Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts
are available when wiring to the relays and that these states will be inverted. In the event of a control
power failure, the contact will return to its normal state.

Use as Level Switch? dflt= NO (Yes/No)


Select this to use this relay output as a level switch. Otherwise, the relay output will be a status
indication.

Table 4-8. List of Options for Level Switch

Not Used HP Valve Demand


Actual Speed AI Signal Monitoring #1
Speed Setpoint AI Signal Monitoring #2
Process/Cascade Input AI Signal Monitoring #3
Process/Cascade Setpoint

Level On (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Enter the level switch ON setting in engineering units. There is an ON and an OFF setting for each
level switch option. This allows the user to program the desired hysteresis for the function selected.
Level Off (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Enter the level switch OFF setting in engineering units.
(Must be less than the ‘Relay On Level’ Setting)

Relay outputs # 2 through # 4 are entered following the same rules as described for Relay above.

Woodward 78
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

LinkNet Nodes Menu


If the Peak200 Feature Pack is purchased and a Site Key License is entered into the control (see
Appendix I), this menu will become available under the Configuration menu.

This section allows you to expand the I/O capability of the Peak200 through the use of Woodward LinkNet
HT distributed I/O nodes. All LinkNet (LN) nodes are connected via the CAN port 2 and should be
configured for a Baud rate of 500K.

LINKNET I/O NODES


Enable Using LinkNet HT I/O Nodes? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Enable Node 1 (AIO) dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If YES – set the Node Address on this device to 1

Node 2 is currently reserved/not used

Enable Node 3 (RTD) dflt= NO (Yes/No)


If YES – set the Node Address on this device to 3
Enable Node 4 (BI) dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If YES – set the Node Address on this device to 4
Enable Node 5 (BO) dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If YES – set the Node Address on this device to 5

General comments about using Linknet distributed I/O –


 Once configured a Linknet I/O button will appear on the HOME run screen to provide quick access to
the channel and node status info
 It is not intended that these channels be used for closed loop control PV signals or valve driver output
signals – use local control channels for those signals
 There is no ‘Loop Powered’ configuration selection for AI’s – this is determined by the p/n of the AIO
node that is purchased
 It is not recommended to program External Trips on these channels, since a loss of a node or the
CAN communication link will result in a Trip
 Linknet I/O specific alarms and/or trips, relating to channels or nodes will produce a summary event
on the VIEW screens. From the VIEW screen a button will be available to display these specific
events

For Node 1 – LN Analog Inputs / Analog Outputs


Each AI/AO node has eight analog input and two analog output channels. Analog Inputs # 2 through # 8
are configured following the same rules as described below.

4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to four milliamps (mA) on the analog input.
20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 20 milliamps (mA) on the analog input.
(Must be greater than the ‘Input 4 mA Value’ Setting)
Input Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Woodward 79
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 4-9. LN Analog Input Function Options

Not Used Bearing Temperature #1


Remote Speed Setpoint Bearing Temperature #2
Process/Cascade Input Bearing Temperature #3
Remote Cascade Setpoint Bearing Temperature #4
Vibration Input #1 Signal Monitoring #1
Vibration Input #2 Signal Monitoring #2
Vibration Input #3 Signal Monitoring #3
Vibration Input #4 HP Valve Feedback Position

Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Units
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a unit label for this channel.
Modbus Multiplier dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the Modbus multiplier that is applied to the engineering units value on this analog input.
Decimals Displayed dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the number of decimals that are shown when this value (in engineering units) appears on the
front panel display.

Under the Node Events (or Channel Events) screen –


Analog Input xx Signal – (for each AI channel)
Use Alarm Setpoint 1? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Level 2 Setpoint as a TRIP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Chan Flt = SD? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to initiate a TRIP if this AI signal is faulted
Channel Fault Delay (sec) dflt= 0.0 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance channel signal faults
Level 1 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 1 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action on this alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Level 2 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 2 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action on this alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Setpoint hysteresis (eng units) dflt= -3.0 (-100, 100)
Enter the hysteresis setting in engineering units for both alarms. A negative setting will allow the
event to occur at the programmed setpoint and stay true until the value falls below the setpoint by
this amount
Delay for Event Action (sec) dflt= 2.0 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance events – this delay is applied to both events
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) dflt= 0.0 (0, 10000)
Enter a value here to inhibit any event from this channel until the turbine has reached this speed
Speed Hysteresis (rpm) dflt= -10.0 (-100, 100)
Enter a hysteresis value here that will be applied to the speed setpoint. This is useful if the speed
setpoint is at an Idle speed setting, where the turbine speed may be held and fluxuate around this speed

For Node 3 – LN RTD Inputs


The RTD node has eight temperature inputs

Minimal Value (Temp Units) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Set the value that corresponds to the lowest temperature expected to be seen as a valid signal
Maximum Value (Temp Units) dflt= 1500 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Set the value that corresponds to the highest temperature expected to be seen as a valid signal
(Must be greater than the ‘Minimum Value’ Setting)

Woodward 80
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Input Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-10. LN RTD Input Function Options

Not Used Temperature Monitoring #1


Bearing Temperature #1 Temperature Monitoring #2
Bearing Temperature #2 Temperature Monitoring #3
Bearing Temperature #3 Temperature Monitoring #4
Bearing Temperature #4 Temperature Monitoring #5
Inlet Steam Temperature Temperature Monitoring #6
Exhaust Steam Temperature Temperature Monitoring #7
Lube Oil Temperature Temperature Monitoring #8
Casing Temperature

Units – use Degrees F for all RTD’s dflt= YES (Yes/No)


Check this to use Degree F for all temperatures, if uncheck all temperatures will be in degrees C
Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Curve Type dflt= European (American, European)
Use this field to select American or European curve for the RTD sensor.
Ohm Value dflt= 100 (100, 200)
Use this field to select either 100 or 200 ohm type RTD sensor
Modbus Multiplier dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the Modbus multiplier that is applied to the engineering units value on this analog input.
Decimals Displayed dflt= 1.0 (0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100)
Set the number of decimals that are shown when this value (in engineering units) appears on the
front panel display.

Under the Node Events (or Channel Events) screen –

RTD Input xx Signal – (for each RTD channel)


Use Alarm Setpoint 1? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use Level 2 Setpoint as a TRIP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Channel Fault Delay (sec) dflt= 1.00 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance channel signal faults
Level 1 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 1 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action on this alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Level 2 Setpoint (eng units) dflt= 0.0 (-90000, 90000)
Enter the alarm level 2 setting in engineering units.
Invert Action on this alarm? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Setpoint hysteresis (eng units) dflt= -3.0 (-100, 100)
Enter the hysteresis setting in engineering units for both alarms. A negative setting will allow the
event to occur at the programmed setpoint and stay true until the value falls below the setpoint by
this amount
Delay for Event Action (sec) dflt= 2.0 (0, 300)
Enter any desire delay to avoid nuisance events – this delay is applied to both events
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) dflt= 100.0 (0, 10000)
Enter a value here to inhibit any event from this channel until the turbine has reached this speed
Speed Hysteresis (rpm) dflt= -10.0 (-100, 100)
Enter a hysteresis value here that will be applied to the speed setpoint. This is useful if the speed
setpoint is at an idle speed setting, where the turbine speed may be held, and fluxuate around this speed

Woodward 81
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

For Node 4 – LN Discrete Inputs


The Discrete Input node has 16 channels available

CONTACT INPUT 01-16


Input Function (must choose from list)
Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-11. LN Discrete Contact Input Options

Not Used Process/Casc Control Enable


Lower Speed Command Rmt Cascade Setpoint Enable
Raise Speed Command External Trip 2
External Trip 1 External Trip 3
Start/External Run External Trip 4
Reset Command External Trip 5
Idle/MinGov Command External Alarm 1
Remote Speed Setpoint Enable External Alarm 2
Select On-Line Dynamics External Alarm 3
Overspeed Test Valve Limiter Open
Raise Process/Casc Setpoint Valve Limiter Close
Lower Process/Casc Setpoint Clock Sync Pulse
Raise Speed/Casc Setpoint
Lower Speed/Casc Setpoint

Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Invert Logic? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Check this box to invert the active state of the input

For Node 5 – LN Discrete Outputs


The Discrete Output node has 16 channels available that drive single contact outputs.

CONTACT OUTPUT 01-16

Contact Output / Level Switch Function (must choose from list)


Scroll through the menu by navigating the focus highlighter to the desired item, pressing ENTER,
using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows, and then pressing the ENTER key again to select the
option/function. Press the ESC key to cancel the selection.

Table 4-12. Options for Contact Outputs if Used to Indicate State

Not Used Overspeed Test Enabled


Shutdown Summary Underspeed Switch
Alarm Summary Cascade PID Control Enabled
Reset Pulse (2 sec) Cascade PID Control Active
Speed PID in Control Process/Cascade PID in Control
Remote Speed Setpoint Enabled Remote Casc Setpoint Enabled
Remote Speed Setpoint Active Remote Casc Setpoint Active
Overspeed Trip HP Valve Limiter in Control
Repeat of Trip Relay On-Line Speed PID Dynamics

Device Tag
This is a user entered field. It allows entry of a short description or tag name for this channel.
Invert Logic? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Use to invert the normal status of the contact output. In the event of a control power failure, the
contact will return to its normal state.

Woodward 82
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Use as Level Switch? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select this to use this contact output as a level switch. Otherwise, the contact output will be a status
indication.

Table 4-13. Options for Level Switch

Not Used HP Valve Demand


Actual Speed AI Signal Monitoring #1
Speed Setpoint AI Signal Monitoring #2
Process/Cascade Input AI Signal Monitoring #3
Process/Cascade Setpoint

Level On (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)


Enter the level switch ON setting in engineering units. There is an ON and an OFF setting for each
level switch option. This allows the user to program the desired hysteresis for the function selected.
Level Off (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-1.0e+38, 1.0e+38)
Enter the level switch OFF setting in engineering units.
(Must be less than the ‘Level On Level’ Setting)

If any AI are configured for use as Vibration Inputs then a VIB Signals screen will be available
under the Analog Input Summary screen –
Configure Vibration Monitoring
Using Vibration Signals? <status LED>
How many signals (1-4)? <status value>
The number of vibration sensors that are configured will appear here
Number of healthy signals required to run (1-4)? dflt= 0 (1,4)
Enter minimum total number of channels required to keep running. If this number equals the number
of channels used, then a single channel fault will result in a Trip

Woodward 83
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 5.
Operating Procedures

Be prepared to make an emergency shutdown when starting the


engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover, to protect against
runaway or overspeed with possible personal injury, loss of life, or
property damage.

Do NOT attempt to operate the turbine until the Peak200 control has
been programmed. Refer to the program worksheets.

Software Architecture
The Peak200 is a field configurable steam turbine control and graphical user interface (GUI) integrated
into one package. The Peak200 control has been designed to run 2 separate, independent programs on
the same platform. One controls the I/O and therefore controls turbine operation. The other program
provides all the visual and command interaction with the user.

Peak 200 Turbine Control

Woodward GAP Qt
Control Application GUI Application
5418-7275_Rev.out 5418-7345_Rev.wgui

Figure 5-1. Software Architecture

The primary application program is the GAP based control application program. This controls all the
system I/O and functional algorithms which control the operation of the turbine.

The secondary application program is the Digia/Qt based graphical user interface (GUI) program. This
controls all the screen information that is displayed to the user. It links to the GAP via an internal
communication link to pass all required interface variables to and from the display.

The exact information of these software part numbers and revisions in your control can always be
found on the Site Info page that is accessible from the main HOME screen.

Both of these programs launch automatically at power-up. The GAP program MUST always be executing
to run the turbine. However, the GUI program may be ‘Stopped’ using a service tool (AppManager) and
restarted at any time without affecting GAP or the turbine operation. This useful feature of the Peak200
allows the following operations to be accomplished (if needed or desired) while the Peak200 control is
operating the turbine.

 Change the language on the screen (future)


 Update/Upgrade the GUI program (newer build revisions with improvement/enhancements)

Woodward 84
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Front Panel Operation

Figure 5-2. Peak200 Keypad with “Splash Screen”

Power-Up Screen
Viewing the front panel display of the Peak200 – the following is the correct boot-up sequence of the
control. Times are approximant.

At Power-up Screen = BLANK /BLACK


IOLOCK = ON (RED)

After about 0:45 Screen = “Woodward Splash Screen”


TRIPPED/CPU/ALARM LED’s will flash check

After about 1:00 TRIPPED=ON (RED)


IOLOCK = OFF
CPU = ON (GREEN)

After about 1:30 ALARM LED (YELLOW) Flashes/Blinks

After about 2:30 Screen = HOME

Any time that a Display application program is not running, the ‘Splash Screen’ will appear. If at power-up
the Alarm LED stops flashing and this screen still appears, then the GUI program has not initialized
correctly.

After configuring the unit, all following power cycles will result in a screen similar to the following,
dependent on what functionality has been configured.

Woodward 85
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 5-3. Boot-up to HOME screen (RemoteView)

Refer to Figure 4.1 for the view of an initial power-up of an unconfigured unit.

To improve the life of the display screen and reduce heat there are 2 features that are implemented, auto-
dimming and a screen saver. If desired, the user does have the ability to adjust and or inhibit these
actions. This is intended to be used in cases where the Peak200 may be packaged in a way that the
screen is not always accessible during normal turbine operation.

Auto-Dimming:
If the user gives no keypad commands for 30 minutes, the backlight brightness of the display will slowly
fade down to 30%. When any keypad key or any user triggered Reset command (contact input, Modbus
or RemoteView) is received, the display will immediately step back up to the level at which the user has
tuned the brightness adjustment. The initial power-up default of the control is 75%.

Screen Saver:
After a period of the same inactivity, the Screen Saver function is invoked. It is defaulted to 4 hours
(adjustable in Service / Screen Settings) – when this comes on, a small version of the ‘Splash Screen’ will
bounce around on the screen. Press any key to revive the display (maroon keys are recommended). User
login level defaults to Operator When awaking from screen saver. This also is adjustable in Service /
Screen Settings if desired where default may be set to awaken in Monitor.

The default factory settings for auto-dimming and screen saver are
set to maximize the life of the display and backlight and reduce
internal heat load of the control. The disabling of these features is
available for troubleshooting – or for cases where the Peak200 is
packaged in a way were screen and keypad access is not available.

Woodward 86
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Control Mode Architecture


See Figure 5-1 for a diagram of basic control program architecture. The control’s normal operating
architecture divides the control into two states.
Run – which includes Operation and Calibration modes
Program - Configuration mode

Pressing the MODE key at any time will open the Login and Mode Screen

In Configuration Mode, the user configures the Peak200 for the specific application and sets all operating
parameters (see Chapter 4). In this mode the control will issue an IOLOCK (LED) and the state of all
Outputs from the control are disabled. This means that all Relays are de-energized and all Analog/Driver
outputs are at zero current. Initially all Peak200’s must be placed in this mode to enter a valid
configuration of the I/O and functions desired for the specific turbine application.

After completing the configuration of the Peak200 and exiting Configuration mode, use Calibration Mode
to perform calibration of signals, verification of speed signals, and the forcing of outputs of the control in
preparation to run the turbine. All I/O is functional in this state. To enter this mode the turbine must be
TRIPPED (LED).

Use Operation Mode to view operating parameters and run the turbine. This is the typical mode the
control uses and is the default mode it enters after a Power-up. All I/O is functional in this state. The
turbine may be either running or not running in this mode. The Peak 200 is defaulted to always boot-up
into operational mode. If required by the site, there is a service parameter to change this so it will boot-up
in monitor mode. Once the unit is running – it can always be placed in Monitor mode by using the Logout
button from the Mode/Login pop-up screen.

Figure 5-4. Control Mode Architecture

Woodward 87
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Overview
The Overview screen will adapt to the configuration of the Peak and show all configured options. During
normal run operation, this screen should provide the user with all of the primary turbine parameter values
and operational status.

Figure 5-5. Overview Screen

The menu bar functions will allow the user to use typical operational commands related to the control loop
selected – such as directly entering a setpoint or enabling or disabling a controller while remaining on the
Overview page.

Speed Control
The Speed Control screen will adapt to the configuration of the Peak200 and show all configured options.
During normal run operation, this screen provides the user with all details that relate to the turbine when
operating in speed control.

Figure 5-6. Speed Control Screen

The menu bar functions will allow the user to access a number of other screens that are related to speed
control, such as directly entering a setpoint, access to the valve limiter feature, adjusting speed control
dynamic settings, enabling or disabling a remote speed setpoint or performing an Overspeed test.

Woodward 88
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Valve Demand
The Valve Demand screen will adapt to the configuration of the Peak200 and show all configured options
that can affect the final output demand to the valve. During normal run operation, this screen provides the
user with a clear picture of what control or ramp is controlling the valve demand output. The Low Signal
Select (LSS) bus will output the lowest value seen at its inputs. The valve logic box represents options
that may be used to adjust this value (such as valve linearization and/or pressure compensation) prior to
output to the HP valve. If these options are not used, the HP valve demand output will always equal the
LSS value.

Figure 5-7. Valve Demand Screen

During normal operation, the Valve Limiter setting is at 100% and not limiting. Typically, the only time this
parameter adjusts is during a start sequence or when troubleshooting system dynamics problems.

The menu bar will allow the user to access the valve limiter setpoint and the manual valve demand (if
configured for use).

Controllers
The Controllers screen will adapt to the configuration of the Peak200 and show all configured options.
During normal run operation, this screen provides the user with information similar to the Overview, but in
a graphical gauge view. It provides larger values for distance viewing and control PID information that is
useful for monitoring when the Peak200 is near transition points between controllers or limiters.

Figure 5-8. Controllers Screen

Woodward 89
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


The menu bar functions will allow the user to use typical operational commands related to the control loop
selected – such as directly entering a setpoint or enabling or disabling a controller while remaining on the
Controllers page

Cascade Control
The Cascade Control screen will adapt to the configuration of the Peak200. During normal run operation,
this screen provides the user with all details that relate to the cascade control loop. The cascade control
output determines the setpoint for the speed control. This allows the Peak200 to vary the speed control
setpoint as it relates to another process variable selected by the user.

Figure 5-9. Cascade Control Screen

The menu bar functions will allow the user to access several other screens that relate to cascade control,
such as directly entering a setpoint, access to the valve limiter, or adjusting cascade control dynamic
settings.

Woodward 90
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Analog Input
The Analog Input Summary screen will display the status of all channels available on the Peak200
hardware. The fault status, function, device tag, engineering value and units display for each channel as
well as navigation buttons for each channel that take the user to a page showing all parameters available
for that input.

Figure 5-10. Analog Input Summary Screen

The menu bar functions will allow the user to access the detailed page of the speed input signals

Contact Input Summary


The Contact Input Summary screen will display the status of channels available on the Peak200
hardware. The fault status and function display for each channel. Use the Details navigation button to
view the full configuration of each channel.

Figure 5-11. Contact Input Summary Screen

Woodward 91
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Analog Output Channel


The Analog Output Channel screen will display the fault status, function, device tag, engineering value
range, present demand value, Readback current and units display for each channel as well as navigation
buttons for each channel that take the user to all of the other available channels for analog outputs.

Figure 5-12. Analog Output Channel Screen

Relay Output Summary


The Relay Output Summary screen will display the status of all channels available on the Peak200
hardware. The coil status, function, and device tag display for each channel. Use the Details navigation
button to view the full configuration of each channel.

Figure 5-13. Relay Output Summary Screen

Woodward 92
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Actuator Driver Summary


The Actuator Driver Summary screen displays the status of the actuator output driver channel on the
Peak200 hardware. The fault status, function, current value (in mA), engineering value, and units display.

Figure 5-14. Actuator Driver Summary Screen

Overspeed Test Function (Speed Control Screen)


The Peak200’s Overspeed Test function allows an operator to increase turbine speed above its rated
operating range to periodically test turbine electrical and/or mechanical overspeed protection logic and
circuitry. This includes the Peak200’s internal overspeed trip logic and any external overspeed trip
device’s settings and logic. Figure 5-15 shows the screen that displays when pressing the ‘Overspeed
Test’ key from the Speed Control page. It shows the permissives required to be able to perform an
overspeed test.

Figure 5-15. Overspeed Test Permissives

Woodward 93
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped


with an overspeed shutdown device to protect against runaway or
damage to the prime mover with possible personal injury, loss of life,
or property damage.

The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the


prime mover control system. An overtemperature or overpressure
shutdown device may also be needed for safety, as appropriate.

The control supports two types of Overspeed tests, internal and external. These tests must be done at the
front panel, or through the RemoteView tool and the following conditions must be met to perform these
tests.
 Unit must be running in speed control mode
 Setpoint must be at Maximum Governor speed, or Reduce Overspeed Setpoint must be selected in
Service mode

Anytime the overspeed test mode has been enabled, the control will annunciate an alarm indicating
Overspeed Test Enabled. If the operator adjusts the speed, the test mode will be active. If the speed
setpoint is not adjusted for a period of more than 30 seconds, the test mode will automatically abort. The
time remaining for this action is always displayed in the Test mode screen.

It is intended that the internal overspeed setpoint in the control is lower than the external setting.

Overspeed Test Procedure (from the Peak200 display)


 Raise the Speed Set Point to the maximum governor setting (or use Reduced Overspeed Test
Option as described in the following section – this figure is shown with that option used)
 If desired, clear the ‘Highest Speed Reached’ value, to record the highest speed reached during this
overspeed test. (Reset Max key)
 This function has a safety timeout to ensure the unit does not run in this mode unattended. Once
entering the mode, the user must begin to raise the speed within 30 seconds. The timeout value
resets if the user is adjusting the speed.
 Timeout value is shown, if it expires the test mode will be aborted and the unit will return to the
maximum governor limit

Figure 5-16. Internal (Peak200) Overspeed Test

 To perform an Internal Overspeed Test Press the Enable Int Test key and the above pop-up page will
appear. An Alarm will be annunciated that indicates Overspeed Test Enabled
 Put the Adjust button in Focus and use the ADJUST key to raise the speed above the normal Max
Governor limit.
 Once turbine speed reaches the Peak200’s internal OVERSPEED TRIP (rpm) setting, the control will
TRIP the turbine

Woodward 94
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 5-17. External Overspeed Test

The intention of an external trip test is to test the unit’s safety overspeed protection device (in many cases
a Woodward ProTech). In this mode, the Peak200 internal overspeed trip changes to be just an alarm
and the Peak200 will allow the speed to continue increasing up to the Overspeed Test Limit (rpm). If the
Peak200 speed OR the Setpoint reaches the Overspeed Test Limit, it will TRIP the turbine

 To perform an External Overspeed Test Press the Enable Ext Test key and the above pop-up page
will appear. An Alarm will be annunciated that indicates Overspeed Test Enabled
 Put the Adjust button in Focus and use the ADJUST key to raise the speed above the normal Max
Governor limit.
 Once turbine speed reaches the Peak200’s internal OVERSPEED TRIP (rpm) setting, the Peak200
will trigger an alarm that this has been reached
 If the timeout expires while the unit is above the Overspeed Trip setting, but below the Overspeed
Test Limit, the Peak200 will Trip on Overspeed
 If the Speed or the Setpoint reach the Overspeed Test Limit the Peak200 will issue a Trip

In the configuration of Speed Setpoints, be sure that the Overspeed


Test Limit rpm value is above the expected Overspeed setting of the
external safety overspeed protection device.

Recommend performing Overspeed Tests from these screens, either at the control (preferred) or via the
RemoteView service tool. Alternatively, you may test the turbine’s overspeed logic and circuitry remotely,
by programming an Overspeed Test contact input. The Overspeed Test contact functions as the enable
external test on the display. When meeting the conditions outlined in the above procedure, closing this
contact allows an increase in the Speed set point up to the “Overspeed Test limit” setting. The testing
procedure is similar to using the OSPD key. You may program an Overspeed Test Enabled relay to
provide testing status feedback.

The Overspeed Test function cannot be performed over the Modbus communications; however, the
Overspeed Test Permissive, Overspeed Test In Progress, Overspeed Alarm, and Overspeed Trip
indications are available through Modbus.

Reduced Overspeed Test Procedure (from the Peak200 display)


The Peak200 has a feature to allow an Overspeed Test to be performed at a reduced speed – without
adjusting the configured Overspeed Trip setpoint (true overspeed setting). The can be useful in testing
the trip system without raising the turbine to a speed level above the normal operating range. This is
especially handy for compressor drive systems which may need to physically decouple the turbine and
compressor to perform an actual full speed overspeed test. User level of Service or higher is required to
use this feature.
Woodward 95
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


In the Service/Speed Control screens, the following options are found:
A check box for Use Reduced Overspeed Setpoint
A Reduced Overspeed Setpoint adjustment value
Upon power-up or exiting IO Lock this value will be set equal to the configured Overspeed setpoint. It can
be adjusted downward to any desired value and when the check box is selected – the unit will used this
Temporary (Lower) setpoint as the Overspeed Trip Limit. Using the above procedure, the user will see
this value in the Overspeed Test dialog boxes while performing the test. Be sure to uncheck this box in
service as soon as the test is complete to ensure that no nuisance, unexpected overspeed trips occur at
this speed while the unit is in normal operation.

There are two programmable relay options available to indicate overspeed status. One programmable
relay option indicates an Overspeed Trip condition. The second relay option provides indication that an
Overspeed Test is being performed.

Alarm Summary
The ALARM screen is always available with the VIEW button under the ALARM LED. When an alarm is
detected, it is latched in the event logic, the Alarm relay is energized, and the ALARM LED illuminates
(Yellow). The cause of the event will be indicated with an Event ID, description, and time/date stamp on
the Alarm Summary page. The list will always place the first event at the top of the list; if more than one
alarm condition is present, they display with their corresponding time stamp.

If the optional LinkNet I/O is added to the system, then a page navigation button will appear that will allow
the user to view a similar list of events that are generated from these signals.

To clear any alarms that are no longer present, press the RESET key, close the Reset contact input, or
select Reset from either Modbus communications link. If the cause of the event has been corrected, the
alarm will clear, if not it will remain, and the timestamp will remain unchanged.

Figure 5-18. Alarm Summary Screen

The Modbus links to the control send the alarm ID number (Analog Read address 39), so that each
individual alarm condition, as per the list below, is available to other systems that monitor the control
status. The system also provides a common alarm indication.

You may program Relay indications, which indicate a Common Alarm, in addition to the dedicated Alarm
Relay output.

Table 5-1 lists all the potential alarm conditions and their Event ID.

Woodward 96
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 5-1. ALARM Messages

Event
ID DESCRIPTION MEANING
1 Speed probe #1 failure — (< Failed Speed Level or 1
Speed Probe #1 Failed Vrms)
2 Speed probe #2 failure — (< Failed Speed Level or 1
Speed Probe #2 Failed Vrms)
3 TRIP Condition Exists
Turbine Tripped
4 Mod Comm Link #1 Modbus link error on serial port – no communications
(Serial)Failed detected
5 Mod Comm Link #2 (ENET1) Modbus link error on Ethernet Port 1 – no communications
Failed detected
6 Mod Comm Link #3 (ENET2) Modbus link error on Ethernet Port 2 – no communications
Failed detected
7 CPU/OS or Internal Calibration Fault
Chassis Summary Alarm
8 Display failed to initialize correctly communicating with the
Peak200 Display Comm Fault GUI program
9 Internal Simulation mode entered from MODE screen
Internal HW Simulation Enabled
10 Actuator Linearization Curve reserved - not used
Error
11 Control has overspeed test mode enabled
Overspeed Test Enabled
12 Turbine is stuck in the critical speed range (turbine failed
Stuck In Critical Band to get thru the range)
13 A difference exists between the two MPU Speed signals
Speed Difference on MPUs (default setting is >50rpm)
14 Peak200 Display Backlight Display failed to initialize on power-up or backlight has
Fault failed
15 Internal Temperature of the control has reached high limit
Peak200 Unit Temp High
alarm of 70 Deg C
16 reserved - not used
spare_16
17 HP Actuator output fault detected (open or short circuit was
HP Actuator Fault (Act1) sensed)
18 reserved - not used
spare_18
19 reserved - not used
spare_19
20 spare_20 reserved - not used
21 External Alarm #1 from contact input
External alarm # 1
22 External Alarm #2 from contact input
External alarm # 2
23 External Alarm #3 from contact input
External alarm # 3
24 reserved - not used
spare_24
25 reserved - not used
spare_25
26 reserved - not used
spare_26

Woodward 97
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Event
ID DESCRIPTION MEANING
27 Remote Speed Setpoint analog input failure detected (> 22
Remote Speed Input Failed mA or < 2 mA)
28 Process/Cascade PV analog input failure detected (> 22
Process/Cascade Input Failed mA or < 2 mA)
29 Remote Process/Casc Input Remote Cascade Setpoint analog input failure detected (>
Failed 22 mA or < 2 mA)
30 Vibration 1 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2
Vibration Input 1 Failed
mA)
31 Vibration 2 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2
Vibration Input 2 Failed
mA)
32 Vibration 3 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2
Vibration Input 3 Failed
mA)
33 Vibration 4 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2
Vibration Input 4 Failed
mA)
34 Bearing Temp 1 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or
Bearing Temp 1 Failed (AI)
< 2 mA)
35 Bearing Temp 2 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or
Bearing Temp 2 Failed (AI)
< 2 mA)
36 Bearing Temp 3 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or
Bearing Temp 3 Failed (AI)
< 2 mA)
37 Bearing Temp 4 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or
Bearing Temp 4 Failed (AI)
< 2 mA)
38 Customer Signal 1 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA
Customer Signal Input #1 Failed
or < 2 mA)
39 Customer Signal 2 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA
Customer Signal Input #2 Failed
or < 2 mA)
40 Customer Signal 3 analog input failure detected (> 22 mA
Customer Signal Input #3 Failed
or < 2 mA)
41 HP Valve Position Feedback HP Valve Position Feedback analog input failure detected
Failed (> 22 mA or < 2 mA)
42 Analog Output Chan 1 readback failure detected (> 22 mA
AO_01 Readback Fault or < 2 mA)
43 Analog Output Chan 2 readback failure detected (> 22 mA
AO_02 Readback Fault or < 2 mA)
44 Analog Output Chan 3 readback failure detected (> 22 mA
AO_03 Readback Fault or < 2 mA)
45 Analog Input chan 1 user configured alarm at level 1
AI Chan 1 Level 1 ALM setpoint
46 Analog Input chan 1 user configured alarm at level 2
AI Chan 1 Level 2 ALM setpoint
47 Analog Input chan 2 user configured alarm at level 1
AI Chan 2 Level 1 ALM setpoint
48 Analog Input chan 2 user configured alarm at level 2
AI Chan 2 Level 2 ALM setpoint
49 Analog Input chan 3 user configured alarm at level 1
AI Chan 3 Level 1 ALM setpoint
50 Analog Input chan 3 user configured alarm at level 2
AI Chan 3 Level 2 ALM setpoint
51 Analog Input chan 4 user configured alarm at level 1
AI Chan 4 Level 1 ALM setpoint
52 Analog Input chan 4 user configured alarm at level 2
AI Chan 4 Level 2 ALM setpoint
53 Error between Valve demand and valve position feedback
HP Valve Pos Fdbk Diff ALM

Woodward 98
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Event
ID DESCRIPTION MEANING
54 Valve limiter is in Control
Limiter in Control
55 Alarm from LinkNet Nodes Summary of Alarms from LinkNet nodes (if used)
56 Internal OVERSPEED Reached Turbine overspeed alarm during External Test
57 Manual Valve Control Enabled Manual HP Valve Control mode is active
58 spare_58 reserved - not used
59 spare_59 reserved - not used
60 spare_60 reserved - not used
61 -100 reserved - not used

Shutdown Summary
The Shutdown Summary screen is always available with the VIEW button under the TRIPPED LED.
When a trip is detected, it is latched in the event logic, the Trip relay is de-energized, all steam valve
demand outputs go to zero, and the TRIPPED LED illuminates (Red). The cause of the event indicates
with an Event ID, description, and time/date stamp on the Shutdown Summary page. The list will always
place the first event at the top of the list; if more than one trip condition is present, they list with their
corresponding time stamp.

Under the active Trip Latch window, this screen will also display the last 5 previous Trips that were
recorded by the Peak200 and are listed with their Event ID, description and time stamp.

If the optional LinkNet I/O is added to the system, then a page navigation button will appear that will allow
the user to view a similar list of events that are generated from these signals.

To clear any shutdowns that are no longer present, press the RESET key, close the Reset contact input,
or select Reset from either Modbus communications link. If the cause of the event has been corrected,
the event will clear, if not it will remain, and the timestamp will remain unchanged.

Woodward 99
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 5-19. Shutdown Summary Screen

Table 5-2 lists all the potential shutdown conditions.

Table 5-2. TRIPPED Messages

Event
ID DESCRIPTION MEANING
1 External Trip Input 3 External Trip contact input was opened
2 Front Display Trip Button Front Panel Display Emergency Stop was pressed
3 Overspeed TRIP Turbine overspeed was sensed
4 All Speed Probes Failed Loss of all speed probes was sensed
5 Trip Command from Modbus Modbus communication link trip was commanded
6 Configuration Error Peak200 has a configuration error
7 Unit in Calibration Mode Peak200 is in Calibration Mode
8 Power Up Trip Peak200 lost power or the Configuration mode was exited
9 External Trip 2 External Trip #2 contact input was opened
10 External Trip 3 External Trip #3 contact input was opened
11 External Trip 4 External Trip #4 contact input was opened
12 External Trip 5 External Trip #5 contact input was opened
13 AI Chan 1 Level 2 TRIP Analog Input chan 1 reached TRIP Level 2
14 AI Chan 2 Level 2 TRIP Analog Input chan 2 reached TRIP Level 2
15 AI Chan 3 Level 2 TRIP Analog Input chan 3 reached TRIP Level 2
16 AI Chan 4 Level 2 TRIP Analog Input chan 4 reached TRIP Level 2
17 Summary TRIP from LinkNet IO Summary Trip from a device on the LinkNet IO
18 At Overspeed Test Max Setpoint During External OSPD test Max setpoint was reached

Woodward 100
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Event
ID DESCRIPTION MEANING
19 HP Actuator Fault HP Actuator fault detected (an open or short circuit was sensed)
20 Spare_20 reserved for future use
21 Spare_21 reserved for future use
22 Spare_22 reserved for future use
23 Spare_23 reserved for future use
24 Spare_24 reserved for future use
25 Spare_25 reserved for future use
26 Spare_26 reserved for future use
27 Spare_27 reserved for future use
28 Spare_28 reserved for future use
29 Spare_29 reserved for future use
30 Spare_30 reserved for future use

Each individual trip condition is available through the Modbus links to monitor the control status. The
system also provides a common trip indication.

Relay indications can be programmed to indicate a Peak200 Shutdown Condition (energizes for a
shutdown condition) or a Trip Relay (de-energizes for a shutdown/trip), in addition to the dedicated
Emergency Trip Relay output.

Speed and Cascade Dynamics Adjustments


Dynamic control values are available on the main Operational pages for speed and cascade control. They
are only available when logged into the Service user level (or higher). The Proportional and Integral Gain
and the Derivative Ratio dynamic adjustments are available under the Dynamics pages for each controller
(SPEED and CASC). To adjust the gain settings, the In-Focus highlighter must be on the component
value to tune. You move the In-Focus highlighter using the navigation Cross. The ADJUST UP and
DOWN keys can then be used to adjust the function In-Focus.

Figure 5-20. Speed Dynamics Adjustment Screen

Woodward 101
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


The Speed and Cascade controls are PID controllers. Adjust the response of each control loop by
selecting the dynamics mode as described above. Proportional gain, integral gain (stability), and SDR
(speed derivative ratio) are the adjustable and interacting parameters used to match the response of the
control loop with the response of the system. They correspond to the P (proportional), I (integral), and D
(derivative) terms, and are displayed by the control as follows:

P = Proportional gain (%)


I = Integral gain (%)
D = Derivative (determined by DR and I)

Tuning P & I Gains


Proportional gain must be tuned to best respond to a system transient or step change. If system response
is unknown, a typical starting value is 5%. If proportional gain is set too high, the control will appear to be
overly sensitive, and may oscillate with a cycle time of less than 1 second.

Integral gain must be tuned gain for best control at steady state. If system response is unknown, a typical
starting value is 5%. If the integral gain is set too high, the control may hunt or oscillate at cycle times of
over 1 second.

For best response, the proportional gain and integral gain should be as high as possible. To obtain a
faster transient response, slowly increase the proportional gain setting until the actuator or final driver
output begins to oscillate or waver. Then adjust the integral gain as necessary to stabilize the output. If
the integral gain adjustment fails to obtain stability, reduce the proportional gain setting.

A well-tuned system, when given a step change, should slightly overshoot the control point then come
into control.

A PID control loop’s gain is a combination of all the gains in the loop. The loop’s total gain includes
actuator gain, valve gain, and valve linkage gain, transducer gain, internal turbine gains, and the Peak
200’s adjustable gains. If the accumulated mechanical gain (actuators, valves, valve linkage, etc.) is very
high, the Peak 200’s gain must be very low to be added to the system gain required for system stability.

In cases where a small change in the Peak 200's output results in a large speed or load change (high
mechanical gain), it may not be possible to take the Peak 200's gains low enough to reach stable
operation. In those cases, review the mechanical interface (actuator, linkage, servo, valve rack) design
and/or calibration and change to achieve a gain of one where 0–100% the Peak 200 output corresponds
to 0–100% valve travel.

Dual Dynamics (Speed/Load)


The Speed PID has two sets of dynamics, On-Line and Off-Line; each include Proportional Gain, Integral
Gain, and Derivative Ratio (DR) variables. There are two ways to switch the dynamics between On-Line
and Off- Line:
 A “Select On-Line Dynamics” contact input is programmed
 User configures the speed setpoint desired to switch from Off-line to On-line

If a contact input is programmed to “Select On-Line Dynamics”, it has priority regardless of the speed
setpoint setting. On-Line dynamics are selected when the contact is closed; when open, Off-Line
dynamics are selected.

If the unit has no “Select On-Line Dynamics” contact input is programmed, when the turbine speed is
below the On-Line speed setpoint speed the Speed Off-Line dynamic settings are used, and On-Line is
used when the speed is above this setpoint. There is a -100-rpm hysteresis on this speed switch. The
default setting of this setpoint is very high, which will in-effect; use just the single dynamic settings (the
Off-Line dynamics) at all times

You may program a relay to indicate that the On-Line Dynamics mode is selected.

Woodward 102
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Tuning Derivative
The value of the Derivative Ratio (DR) term can range from 0.01 to 100. If unsure of the correct value, set
the Speed control’s DR term to 5% and the Cascade controllers’ DR terms to 100%. In order to simplify
adjustment of the dynamics, adjusting the integral gain value sets both the I and D terms of the PID
controller. The DR term establishes the degree of effect the integral gain value has on the "D" term and
changes the configuration of a controller from input rate sensitive (input dominant) to feedback rate
sensitive (feedback dominant) and vice versa.

Another possible use of the DR adjustment is to reconfigure the controller from a PID to a PI controller.
Do this by adjusting the DR term to its upper or lower limits, depending on whether an input or feedback
dominant controller is desired.
 A DR setting of 1 to 100 selects feedback dominant mode.
 A DR setting of .01 to 1 selects input dominant mode.
 A DR setting of .01 or 100 selects a PI only controller, input and feedback dominant respectively.

The change from one of these configurations to the other may have no effect during normal operation;
however, it can cause great differences in response when the governor is coming into control (At start-up,
during a full load change, or during transfer of control from another channel).

An input dominant controller is more sensitive to the change-of-rate of its input (Speed or Cascade input),
and can therefore prevent overshoot of the set point better than a feedback dominant controller. Although
this response is desirable during a start-up or full load rejections, it can cause excessive control motions
in some systems where a smooth transition response is desired.

A controller configured as feedback dominant is more sensitive to the change-of- rate of its feedback
(LSS). A feedback dominant controller has the ability to limit the rate of change of the LSS bus when a
controller is near its set point but is not yet in control. This limiting of the LSS bus allows a feedback
dominant controller to make smoother control transitions than an input dominant controller.

Tuning Example
If the system is unstable, make sure the governor is the cause. This can be checked by closing the valve
limiter until it has control of the actuator output. If the governor is causing the oscillation, time the
oscillation cycle time. A rule-of- thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is less than 1 second
reduce the Proportional gain term. A rule-of-thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is greater the 1
second reduce the Integral gain term (proportional gain may need to be increased also).

On an initial start-up, all PID dynamic gain terms typically require adjustment to match the respective
PID’s response to that of the entire control loop (controller, actuator, valve, turbine, and speed input
signals).

Figure 5-28 shows the typical response to a load change when the dynamics are optimally adjusted.

Figure 5-21. Typical Response to Load Change

Woodward 103
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

The above information is the traditional information for tuning


Woodward’s implementation of a PID. Initially these steps should be
followed to gain reasonably stable speed control. The Peak200 control
also contains a new automated PID Optimization routine that can be
used on the Speed PID. For information on using this feature is found
in Appendix C.

Process/Cascade Droop
The Process/Cascade controller can be programmed to use droop for control loop stability. If the
parameter being controlled is also being controlled by another device (letdown station, boiler, or other
turbine), droop is typically required for control loop stability. If required, no less than 5% droop is
recommended for stable operation.

Relays
TRIP RELAY (Relay #1): The TRIP relay is activated as part of a turbine trip as a result of pressing the
TRIP keypad button, as a result of losing the EXTERNAL TRIP input on Discrete Input #3, or as a result of
one of the internal trip conditions on the Peak200. This relay is dedicated to this function and cannot be
changed.

The TRIP relay opens a set of contacts when tripped. This set of contacts is used in many systems as
part of a trip string where any of the safety systems can open the string and trip the turbine. The string
usually consists of inputs from the lube oil system, the turbine vibration system, an over speed trip device
or one of the trips on the Peak200.
 It is important to note that if this ‘trip string’ from the user ‘Opens’ the EXTERNAL TRIP input contact
(on DI03) then the Peak200 can be stuck in a trip loop, in that its output will not clear because it
needs this input to be healthy first. The following explains 2 ways to avoid this – both of these
options are found in the Configuration of the Relay Output 01 – Trip Relay screen
 To overcome this trip loop, the Peak200 can be configured so that RESET CLEARS TRIP. When this
is configured TRUE and the RESET is closed momentarily, all trips are overridden, and the TRIP
relay resets. This restores the speed control output in the trip string so the turbine operator can
RESET the turbine for the next start.
 Another option to avoid this – is the option INCLUDE EXTERNAL TRIP IN OUTPUT? If this box is
unchecked then the EXTERNAL TRIP input contact (on DI03) will Trip the control, but it will not
include this trip in the status of the Relay #1 output.

The TRIP relay defaults at DE-ENERGIZE to trip. However, the TRIP relay can be configured to
ENERGIZE to trip by setting TRIP RELAY ENERGIZES FOR TRIP to TRUE in the program.

ALARM RELAY (Relay #2): The ALARM relay energizes when an alarm condition is detected. Even
though the turbine continues to operate with an alarm condition, the ALARM condition should be
corrected before it develops into a trip condition. The default is that this will reflect the status of the
summary Alarm latch, it will be energized if any alarm is present. It is possible in SERVICE
(SCREEN/KEY OPTIONS) to select an option for this relay to blink (toggle) whenever a new alarm comes
in. This relay is defaulted to this function; however, it can be changed to another function if needed.

CONFIG RELAY #3 & #4: The CONFIG relays can be configured for via the menu selections for either
state indications or a level switch based on one of the analog variables listed. The CONFIG relays will be
energized to indicate the function.

Woodward 104
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Prior To Turbine Start


 Program the Peak200 for the specific turbine application (see Appendix for program worksheets).
 Stroke the actuator (linkage) to ensure that the turbine can be shut down when calling for 0%
actuator position and can reach full load when calling for 100% actuator position (see Stroking
Actuator).
 Be prepared to adjust the system dynamics when the Peak200 takes control of the speed (see
Dynamics Adjustments).

When starting the turbine, monitor the speed readout to ensure you
have a good speed signal from the magnetic speed pickups,
especially on initial turbine start.

Refer to turbine manufacturer's operating procedures for complete


information on turbine start-up.

Turbine Start
When starting the turbine, both the actuator and the Peak200 have minimum startup requirements:
 The Peak200 needs a 1.0 Vrms MPU signal to sense speed.
 The Actuator, when driven directly from the turbine, requires enough speed to develop the force
required to operate the steam valves or servo valve.

Starting Procedures (Start Curve Screen)

Figure 5-22. HOME Menu showing “Startup Curve” IN-Focus

Refer to the turbine manufacturer’s operating procedures for complete information on turbine start up, and
Chapter 3 of this manual for a step-by-step procedure, depending on the start mode selected. The
following is a typical start- up procedure:

Woodward 105
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped


with an overspeed shutdown device to protect against runaway or
damage to the prime mover with possible personal injury, loss of life,
or property damage.

The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the


prime mover control system. An overtemperature or overpressure
shutdown device may also be needed for safety, as appropriate.

1. Press the RESET key to clear all alarms and trips. If the Peak200’s RESET CLEARS TRIP setting is
programmed "YES", then the control's shutdown relay will reset or energize upon pressing the
RESET key after a shutdown. If the RESET CLEARS TRIP OUTPUT setting is programmed "NO",
the control's shutdown relay will reset or energize upon pressing the Reset key ONLY after all trip
conditions are cleared.
2. Press the START key to initiate the selected start-up mode. This will function from any screen, but
recommend observing the Startup Curve page during the turbine startup. It will automatically match to
show the correct information relative to the start sequence configuration. In either Manual or
Automatic Start mode, the control will increase the valve limiter to open the control valve. The control
will ramp the valve to 100% open to allow for any pre-heating (warm-up) that needs to be done. The
operator must manually increase the Throttle valve to bring the turbine up to the first control speed
setpoint (either Idle or Minimum Governor).
Note: The START keypad command can be configured to require a confirmation dialog box to
appear to activate the turbine start. It is default to not use the dialog box so that it will operate the
same as the contact input or Modbus commanded start.
3. After performing the selected start-up mode, the turbine will operate at the minimum or idle speed
setting. The Peak200’s speed set point will move to minimum governor speed unless an idle speed
was programmed. You must program the control to use the Auto Start mode for the control to allow
the Start Sequence functions for the turbine to control at idle speed. An operator at this time may vary
turbine speed through the Peak200's keypad, external switches, or communication links.

The Peak200 and actuator rely on an alternate means of opening the governor valve or applying bypass
steam to roll the turbine for startup. The minimum speed at which the Peak200 can control turbine speed
depends on the minimum speed required to meet these two conditions (see the actuator specifications).

Idle/Minimum Ramp
If the Peak200 control is programmed for a MANUAL START, this section can be ignored. When
MANUAL START is configured, speed control will begin at MIN GOVERNOR SPEED which is much
higher than IDLE speed. In the manual start mode, all speed control, including avoiding the CRITICAL
SPEED BAND, is the responsibility of the operator until the turbine reaches MIN GOVERNOR SPEED.

If the control is programmed for AUTO START, the Peak200 will begin controlling the turbine speed at
IDLE speed. The following apply to the AUTO START mode.

The turbine can be accelerated either manually or automatically from IDLE to

MIN GOVERNOR SPEED.


 To operate the system manually, use the RAISE or LOWER buttons or inputs. When a button is
closed, the turbine speed will change. When the button is opened, the turbine runs at the current
speed.
 To operate the system automatically, use one of the following:
o Close the IDLE / MIN GOV input.
o Use the keypad commands on the START CURVE screen to go to Idle Speed or go to Min
Governor Speed
o Press the START button on the front panel, once the unit has started and reached Idle speed,
repressing the START key will command the control to ramp up to Min Governor speed
 This ramp will accelerate the turbine at the Rate to Minimum rate.

Woodward 106
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


If a CRITICAL SPEED BAND has been defined, the ramp rate of the speed increase (or decrease) in this
band will be the CRITICAL BAND RATE. When the speed of the turbine is outside the CRITICAL SPEED
BAND the ramp rate will return to the IDLE / MIN GOV RATE.

The IDLE to MIN GOVERNOR SPEED ramp can be stopped at any point between IDLE SPEED and MIN
GOVERNOR SPEED, except within the CRITICAL SPEED BAND:
 By pressing the RAISE or LOWER button on the front panel.
 By closing the external RAISE or LOWER contact.
 By opening the IDLE / MIN GOV input if one of the following scenarios has been programmed:
o The USE RAMP TO IDLE function is set FALSE.
o The USE RAMP TO IDLE function is set TRUE

If the speed is below the MIN GOVERNOR SPEED set point, the IDLE to MIN GOVERNOR SPEED ramp
can be changed with the RAISE / LOWER buttons, or it can be restarted:
 By toggling the IDLE / MIN GOV input.
 By pressing the START button on the front panel with the IDLE/MIN GOV input open.

If the speed is below MIN GOVERNOR SPEED and the IDLE / MIN GOV input is opened, the speed set
point will move back to IDLE speed at the IDLE / MIN GOV RATE if:
 USE RAMP TO IDLE is set TRUE.

When the speed is at or above MIN GOVERNOR SPEED opening the IDLE / MIN GOV input will not
lower the turbine speed to IDLE speed.

The IDLE / MIN GOV input can be open or closed during turbine start-up.

 If the IDLE / MIN GOV input is open, when the trips are cleared, pressing the START button will
ramp the turbine speed to IDLE.
 If the IDLE / MIN GOV input is closed, when the trips are cleared, pressing the START button will
ramp the turbine speed to the MIN GOVERNOR SPEED.

Critical Speed Band Avoidance


If the unit is configured to use the Automatic Start Mode, then a speed avoidance band can also
(optionally) be configured under the Speed Setpoint menu. Many steam turbine OEM’s define a speed
range, below the minimum governor speed setting, that should be avoided – typically to keep the turbine
from operating in areas where high vibrations can occur.

The actual speed setpoint will not be allowed to stop when it is in this range. The ramp will continue at the
CRITICAL BAND RATE until the speed setpoint and actual speed are outside the CRITICAL SPEED
BAND then stop.

While operating in the CRITICAL SPEED BAND, if a LOWER command is issued while the ACTUAL
SPEED SETPT is increasing, the direction will reverse and return to the CRITICAL SPEED MIN setting. If
a RAISE command is issued while the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT is decreasing, the direction will reverse
and run the speed to the CRITICAL SPEED MAX setting.

Speed Control
The SPEED CONTROL compares the turbine SPEED with the ACTUAL SPEED SETPOINT. When the
two values are equal, the output of this controller will be a constant demand (from 0-100%), the actuator
signal will follow this value (The actuator output range is selected in the ACTUATOR CONFIGURATION
MENU as either 4-20 mA or 0-200 mA).

The ACTUAL SPEED signal is the output of the MPU HSS (HIGH SIGNAL SELECTOR). The ACTUAL
SPEED SETPT is either the LOCAL SPEED SETPT or the REMOTE SPEED SET depending on which
mode has been configured and is enabled.

Woodward 107
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


When needed, the speed control can be configured to use DROOP feedback. Droop is defined as a
decrease in speed set point proportional to an increase in load. The DROOP Signal is a function of the
VALVE POSITION (ACTUATOR) signal. When DROOP is configured, the SPEED CONTROL compares
the ACTUAL SPEED SET POINT to the combination of the SPEED signal plus the DROOP signal.

Speed Control Screen


The speed control screen will show two basic modes of adjusting the speed setpoint, manual control and
remote speed setpoint control.

If the control has been configured for droop, the turbine speed will
always be less than the speed set point. The difference will depend on
the amount (%) of droop selected during programming.

Manual Speed Setpoint Mode


Manual Speed Setpoint mode is defined as:
 Changing the Speed Setpoint with the RAISE and LOWER buttons on the FRONT PANEL.
 Changed in the Speed Setpoint with the ENTERED SPEED and GO To commands from the FRONT
PANEL.
 Changing the Speed Setpoint with the RAISE and LOWER discrete inputs.
 Changing the Speed Setpoint with the RAISE SPEED and LOWER SPEED Modbus commands.

This mode is available at all times when the Remote Speed Setpoint mode is disabled.

The Speed Setpoint will change at the setpoint SLOW RATE, set by the user in Service Mode for either
Offline, or Online dependent on the speed of the turbine. If the command is continuously entered for
longer than the FAST RATE DELAY time, then the setpoint will move at the FAST RATE.

If the Remote Speed Setpoint option has been configured and the analog input for this value is healthy,
the REMOTE SETPOINT mode can be enabled. This can be done through a discrete input, Modbus
command or via the FRONT PANEL.

Remote Speed Setpoint Mode


The Remote Speed Setpoint mode is when an external 4–20 mA signal sets the Speed Setpoint. (This
4–20 mA input, called the REMOTE SPEED SETPOINT signal, normally comes from a PLC or manual
turbine control station). This mode is enabled by the user through a discrete input, Modbus command, or
via the FRONT PANEL.

The user in the Speed Setpoint Configuration menu sets the rate, at which the Remote Speed Setpoint
can change. There are two rates – the Normal Rate and the Not Matched Rate, both of these are also
available for adjustment from the Ramp Speed Setpoint pop-up screen during turbine operation and both
are set in the units of rpm/sec. If the speed and the setpoint have a difference greater than 0.5% of the
current speed setpoint value, the setpoint will move at the Not Matched Rate, if the speed versus setpoint
difference is less than this amount, the setpoint ramp will move at the Normal rate.

The remote speed setpoint is defined by an analog input signal. The minimum (4mA) and maximum
(20mA) values for this range must be set equal to or within the range set by the values assigned to the
MIN GOV SPEED and the MAX GOV SPEED respectively.

Before the Remote Speed Setpoint mode can be enabled, the following operating conditions must be
met:
 The turbine speed must be above the MIN GOV SPEED.
 The REMOTE SPEED ENABLE input must be closed.
 The Remote Speed Setpoint signal must be between 2 mA and 22 mA.

Woodward 108
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


With the IDLE / MIN GOV input closed, and the turbine speed above MIN GOV SPEED, when the
REMOTE SPEED ENABLE input is closed, the ACTUAL SPEED SETPT will ramp from the current speed
to the REMOTE SPEED SET input at the REMOTE-NOT-MATCHED RATE.

The Remote Speed Set Point may be in one of the following states (message status is found on the
remote speed setpoint pop-up screen):
 Disabled—The remote set point function is not enabled and will have no effect on the speed set
point.
 Enabled—The remote set point has been enabled.
 Active—The remote set point is in control of the Speed set point but the speed PID is not in control of
the actuator output.
 In Control—The remote set point is in control of the Speed set point and the speed PID is in control
of the actuator output.
 Inhibited— The remote set point cannot be enabled. The input signal has failed, the unit is shut
down, or remote set point is not programmed.

The Peak200 will stay in the remote speed setpoint mode unless one of the following occurs:
 The REMOTE SPEED ENABLE input is opened, or a disable command is given from the front panel
or Modbus.
 SPEED is reduced to below MIN GOV SPEED.
 A SHUTDOWN occurs.
 A REMOTE INPUT FAILURE occurs. The ACTUAL SPEED SETPT will be the value of the REMOTE
SPEED SETTING input at the time when a REMOTE SPEED SET failure is detected.

Shutdown and Alarm Function Summary


A shutdown condition is signaled by the TRIP relay which defaults as DE-ENERGIZE on trip. It can be
configured to ENERGIZE on trip by checking the Invert Logic box on the Configuration / Relay Output 01
screen.

Alarm conditions are signaled by the ALARM relay energizing when an alarm is present. It can be
configured to de-energize on alarm by checking the Invert Logic box on the Configuration / Relay Output
02 screen.

The TRIP and ALARM functions latch. A RESET is required once the condition is corrected to clear the
latch. If the governor is TRIPPED, a RESET command will clear the TRIP RELAY output and the front
panel TRIPPED LED if configured for RESET CLEARS TRIP = TRUE. This does not clear the TRIP input
on discrete input channel 3, which may be a part of the turbine trip string. When an operator resets this
string, the turbine is ready to start. (If an EXTERNAL TRIP still exists, the control will not initiate a start).

Valve Ramp (Limiter) Control


Either the output of the VALVE RAMP or the SPEED CONTROL is used to open and close the steam
valve during turbine operation. These outputs are LOW SIGNAL SELECTED by the LSS Bus so that the
control function with the lowest demand sets the position of the actuator.

The VALVE RAMP is opened via the START COMMAND during START UP to run its output out of the
way of the SPEED CONTROL (100%-Open). When the control gets a TRIP command, the VALVE RAMP
over rides the SPEED CONTROL and closes the ACTUATOR (0%-Closed).

The SPEED CONTROL increases or decreases the steam demand signal during normal turbine
operation.

In the MANUAL START MODE, the Trip & Throttle valve holds the steam valve closed while the outputs
of the VALVE RAMP and the SPEED CONTROL are driven quickly to 100% and to the MIN GOVERNOR
speed. Start is initiated when the Peak200 is RESET and receives a START command. Initial speed
control is via the Trip & Throttle valve with the operator in control of the turbine speed.

Woodward 109
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Initially in the AUTO START MODE, the VALVE RAMP, and SPEED CONTROL hold the ACTUATOR at
the closed position. Before a START command is given, the operator opens the Trip & Throttle valve.
When given a START command the VALVE RAMP is opened slowly to apply steam to the turbine. At the
same time, the LOCAL SPEED SETPT starts ramping from zero to IDLE speed. When the turbine speed
exceeds the LOCAL SPEED SETPT, the SPEED CONTROL closes the actuator until it is controlling the
turbine speed at the SET POINT.

Manual Valve Demand (Ramp) Control


If desired, the control can be placed into manual valve demand mode. This is only available in Service
mode, only enabled for a time-limited period and is intended to be used as a tool for troubleshooting
system problems (for example a valve instability problem). It is designed for bumpless transition from
speed control into this mode – but the user must manually ensure the speed setpoint is at the correct
point when switching back into speed control.
Zero Speed Signal Override
The Peak200 issues a shutdown if no speed signal is detected (magnetic pickup voltage less than 1 Vrms
or speed is less than the ‘Failed Speed Level’). To allow the control to start with speed not being sensed,
this shutdown logic must be overridden. The control provides an automatic speed override for this
purpose. For added protection, a timed limit on the override is available. The status of the MPU override
logic may be viewed in the Service mode or through Modbus communications. The override logic applies
to both speed probes.

Automatic Speed Override


The Automatic Speed Override logic is used by the Peak200 to override the loss-of-speed signal
shutdown logic during a turbine start-up. With the Automatic Override logic, the loss-of-speed signal
failure is armed when the turbine trips and remains armed until the sensed turbine speed exceeds the
programmed (‘Failed Speed Level’ setting + 50 rpm). Once turbine speed exceeds this level, the loss of
speed detection circuit is re-armed and the control will execute a system shutdown if sensed speed drops
below the ‘Failed Speed Level’ setting.

For added protection, a timed limit is available on the automatic speed override function. The timed speed
override timer deactivates the loss-of-speed override logic after the programmed time expires. If
programmed, this timer starts counting down once a ‘START’ command has been issued. This timer
when programmed provides an extra level of protection, in the event both speed input probes are failed
when the unit is started. This timer may be programmed in the Service menu under MPU Override.

Slow Roll Down Failsafe Override


The USE SLOW ROLLDOWN OVRD function differentiates between the gradual loss of the speed signal
and a sudden loss of the speed signal. The use of this option is to eliminate a nuisance trip when the
turbine is manually shutdown or rolled down with the Trip & Throttle Valve gradually closed.

When the speed gradually drops below the setting of The Rolldown Speed for the time set by the
Rolldown Delay, the MPU’s override is switched on. This prevents a LOSS OF BOTH MPUs trip and
drives the Peak200 governor valve opens fully as turbine speed decreases.

A sudden loss of the MPU inputs trips the turbine and closes the governor valve.

Woodward 110
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Actuator Calibration/Stroking Procedure

Before calibrating or testing, the unit must be tripped and the steam
supply removed. This is to ensure that opening the control valve(s)
will not allow steam into the turbine. Overspeeding the turbine may
cause damage to turbine and can cause severe injury or death to
personnel. STEAM TO THE TURBINE MUST BE SHUT OFF BY OTHER
MEANS DURING THIS PROCESS.

1. The Peak200 must be shutdown to enter Calibration Mode.


2. Go to the MODE screen by pressing the MODE key.
3. Enter Calibration Mode by pressing the ‘Calibration’ softkey. The following permissives must be met:
a. Unit Shutdown
b. No Speed Detected
c. Appropriate User Level Login (Service or higher)
4. Navigate to the Driver page by pressing the ‘Driver’ in either the HOME menu or Configure menu.
5. On the Actuator screen, press the ‘Calibration’ softkey to access the calibration options.
6. Press the ‘Force Output’ softkey to access the Actuator Forcing screen.
7. Verify the green “Calmode Enabled” LED is ON to confirm that the unit is in Calibration Mode.
8. Press the ‘Forcing’ sofkey. Then confirm on the popup that actuator forcing can be enabled by
selecting ‘OK’ and pressing ENTER.
9. Verify that the green “Forcing Enabled” LED is now also ON.
10. Use the focus navigation to select and adjust items on the screen (Manual Adjust, Goto Demand,
Force Rate, etc.).
11. Actuator current output at min and max can be adjusted by selecting “mA at 0% Demand” or “mA at
100% Demand”. Use the up/down Adjust arrows or numerical keypad and ENTER key to the change
the values. (Ideally the minimum and maximum current values should be adjusted, and the Gain and
Offset values left at 1 and 0 respectfully)
12. Press the ‘Commands’ softkey to access other commands such as “Go to Min”, Go to Max”, and
“GO”. “GO” can be used with the “Goto Demand” value.
13. When finished, make sure to save the settings by pressing any ‘Save Settings’ softkey. A ‘Save
Settings’ softkey can be accessed on the MODE screen.
14. Exit Calibration Mode by pressing the ‘Exit Calmode’ softkey from the MODE page. Exiting this mode
will automatically disable the force mode.

If changes are made to the minimum or maximum current values, they can be recorded on the Configure
Mode worksheets. Exiting the Calibration Mode or Forcing Mode will not permanently save any calibration
changes.

Press the ‘Save Settings’ softkey to permanently save any minimum or


maximum actuator settings into the Peak 200. If variables are tuned or
changed but not stored to a file, then those changes will be lost if
power is removed from the control or if the control receives a CPU
reset.

Woodward 111
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 6.
Modbus Communications

Introduction
The Peak200 control can communicate to other devices via serial RS-232 or RS-485 using an ASCII or
RTU MODBUS transmission protocol. The pertinent serial port communications parameters are all
adjustable in the Configuration mode of the Peak200 control. The loss of the communications link is
annunciated if the Modbus serial port is configured for use.

The control can also communicate Modbus information via Ethernet. Either Modbus UDP or TCP/IP
protocol which can be utilized from Ethernet port 1. Modbus utilizes a master/slave protocol. This protocol
determines how a communication network’s master and slave devices establish and break contact, how a
sender is identified, how messages are exchanged, and how errors are detected. The configuration of the
Peak200’s TCP/IP address is available in the Configuration menu under Communications.

All pertinent control parameters are programmed to be displayed on a CRT or plant DCS computer. In
addition, all relevant control functions (i.e., raise/lower or enable) can be executed through this link. The
functional block diagram (see Chapter 2) shows all Modbus parameters and their address. See Figure 2-1
for an example showing the Modbus communications connections. The example shows that Boolean
write registers 1 and 2 are for raising and lowering the speed set point, respectively. It also shows that
analog read register 2 contains the speed set point value.

Figure 6-1. Modbus Communication Connections

Modbus Wiring
The Peak200 control with Modbus option can communicate to one device via RS- 232 or RS-485 using
an ASCII or RTU MODBUS transmission protocol. The communications port is brought out to terminal
blocks for wiring. Each communications mode is wired to different terminals. The following section
identifies the terminal landings required for each mode.

Woodward 112
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

RS-232 Wiring
An RS-232 link is limited to 15 m (50 feet). The Peak200 control utilizes the COM 1 terminal block on the
side of the unit for RS-232 connections. Figure 6-2 shows typical RS-232 communications connection.
The transmit data (TXD), receive data (RXD), and signal ground (SIG GND) must be properly connected
as shown. In addition, the shield (SHLD) should be connected at one end only.

Figure 6-2. Typical RS-232 Communications

RS-485 Wiring
RS-485 can also accommodate transmission distances up to 1200 m (4000 feet). The Peak200 control
utilizes the COM 1 terminal block on the side of the unit for RS-485 connections. Figure 6-3 shows a
typical RS-485 communications connection. The data lines (485+ and 485–), and signal ground (SIG
GND) must be properly connected as shown. In addition, the shield (SHLD) should be connected at one
end only. The last unit in the Modbus network chain should have its receiver terminated with a resistor.
The Peak200 control has termination resistors built-in and available at the terminal block (TERM RES +
and TERM RES -). Properly terminate the RS-485 cable at the Modbus master. Use the alternate wiring if
no signal ground is available at the Modbus master.

Figure 6-3. Typical RS-485 Communications

Woodward 113
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Basic Modbus Overview


The Peak200 control utilizes Modicon Inc.'s Modbus protocol (see Figure 6-4 for Basic Modbus
Overview). There are two transmission modes available for use with the Modbus protocol; ASCII and RTU
(see Figure 2-6). The Peak200 control can only act as a slave unit, it responds only after being asked for
a set of parameters. Typically, the Peak200 control will communicate with a Modbus Master device with a
separate link to each device (i.e., point to point wiring). However, if Ethernet or serial RS-485 is used,
several Peak200 controls can be connected to one Master device on a single link (i.e., multidropping).
The data is passed between the Master and the Peak200 control in the form of message frames (see
Table 6-1). The default slave address for the Peak200 control is 01, however, this address is adjustable in
the configure mode. On any single link, each slave address must be unique.

Modbus Points of Interest


 Master, Slave network protocol
 One master and up to 32 slaves on a common line
 Only the master initiates a transaction
 A transaction comprises a single query and a single response
 Data passed between master and slave in the form of message frames
 It may be helpful to use slower baud rates if multi-dropping is used

Figure 6-4. Basic Modbus Overview

Modes of Transmission
 ASCII and RTU are the two modes allowed.
 Mixing of modes is not allowed.
 ASCII mode requires twice as many characters as RTU mode to transmit the same amount of data.
 RTU mode has more elaborate error checking.

The control supports both ASCII and RTU message frame types. The following table shows the definition
of each type.

Table 6-1. Modbus Transmission Modes

Characteristic ASCII RTU


Coding System Hexadecimal 8 Bit Binary
Bits per Character 7 8
Parity Even, Odd, None Even, Odd, None
Stop Bits 1 or 2 1 or 2
Transmitted Data Per Character 4 bits 8 Bits
Error Checking LRC (Longitude Redundancy CRC (Cyclical Redundancy
Check) Check)

Woodward 114
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Frame Definition
 Each slave must have a unique address.
 The function code tells the addressed slave what function to perform.
 The high order bit of the function code is used to indicate an exception response.
 The data field contains information needed by the slave or collected by a slave to perform a specific
function.
 The error checking assures that the slave or master does not react to messages that have changed
during transmission.

Table 6-2. Modbus Frame Definition

Function ASCII RTU


Beginning of Frame : 3 Characters Dead Time
Slave Address 2 Characters, 8 Bits 1 Character, 8 Bits
Function code 2 Characters, 8 Bits 1 Character, 8 Bits
Data 4 Bits Data per Character 8 Bits Data per Character
Error Check Code 2 Characters, 8 Bits 2 Characters, 16 Bits
End of Frame CR LF 3 Characters Dead Time

The data is passed between the Master and the Peak200 control in the form of message frames. The
function code portion of the frame tells the addressed slave what function to perform (see Table 6-3).

Function Code Definition


Table 6-3. Modbus Function Codes

Code Description
1 Read Digital Outputs
2 Read Digital Inputs
3 Read Analog Outputs
4 Read Analog Inputs
5 Write Single Digital Output
6 Write Single Analog Output
7 Loopback Test - Returns the Query Message
8 Write Digital Outputs
9 Write analog Outputs

Table 6-2 shows typical Modbus frames for the various function codes. If a slave detects an error in a
message, it will not act on or respond to that message. For any requested data that is undefined, the
slave will respond with a value of zero. The slave will respond with an exception response if it detects
illegal data in a message. The following table lists the exception errors displayed by the Peak200 control.
If the Peak200 control has an exception error, it will be annunciated under the Port Adjustments heading
in the Service mode (see Chapter 7).

Table 6-4. Peak200 Exception Errors

Code Name Meaning


1 Illegal Function The message function is not an allowable action
2 Illegal Data Address The message start address is not an allowable address
9 Checksum Error The received message had an incorrect error check code
10 Garbled Message The received message could not be decoded

Woodward 115
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure 6-5. Modbus Messages

Port Adjustments
Following is listed the parameters that can be set in the SERVICE Mode under Communications

 Use Modbus Trip - Enable or Disable a Trip command via Modbus


 Enable Link 1 (Serial) Writes – Enable or Disable writes from this link
 Enable Link 2 (Ethernet) Writes – Enable or Disable writes from this link

 Link Status: This will indicate Green if the Modbus communication link is healthy – when off the
Alarm will annunciate that this link has been lost.

 Exception Error: This will indicate TRUE if an exception error is found in the transmitted data.

 Error Code: This indicates the cause of the exception error. The following list shows the error codes
and their meanings.
1 = Illegal Function: The message function is not an allowable action.
2 = Illegal Data Address: The message start address is not an allowable address.
3 = Illegal Data Value: Amount of data requested from slave to too large for slave to return (our
maximum is 118 registers)
9 = Checksum Error: The received message had an incorrect error check code.
10 = Garbled Message: The received message could not be decoded.

 Time-out Delay: This indicates the amount of time that the link will attempt to communicate before
annunciating that a link error exists.

Modbus Addresses
The Modbus communication port has address locations for the analog and Boolean reads and writes. The
Boolean reads and writes are also referred to as input and holding coils. The analog reads are also
referred to as input registers. Following is a list of these register values along with a brief description of
the parameter.

Woodward 116
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Boolean Writes (holding coils)—Holding coils are logical signals that are both readable from and
writable to the Peak200 control. The holding coils available are listed below. A logical true denoted by the
value 1 will cause the command listed in the description to be executed. For example, if a 1 is written to
address 0:0001, the manual speed set point will increase until a 0 is written to address 0:0001. The
Peak200 control supports function codes 1, 5, and 15. These correspond to reading selected holding
coils, writing to a single holding coil, and writing to multiple holding coils, respectively.

Table 6-5. Available Holding Coils

Address Description
0:0001 Raise Speed Setpoint
0:0002 Lower Speed Setpoint
0:0003 Emergency Shutdown
0:0004 System Reset
0:0005 Start / Run
0:0006 Go To Min Governor
0:0007 Go To Idle
0:0008 Enable Remote Speed SP
0:0009 Disable Remote Speed SP
0:0010 Raise (Open) Valve Limiter
0:0011 Lower (Close) Valve Limiter
0:0012 Raise Process/Cascade Setpoint
0:0013 Lower Process/Cascade Setpoint
0:0014 Enable Remote CASC SP
0:0015 Disable Remote CASC SP
0:0016 Enable Process/CASC Control
0:0017 Disable Process/CASC Control
0:0018
0:0019
0:0020

The functional block diagram (Chapter 2) shows all Modbus


communications inputs and outputs to the Peak200 control's software.
It shows both the functional location of the parameter as well as the
Modbus address. This information is shown with the symbol xx where
xx is the Modbus address.

Boolean Reads (input coils)—Input coils are logical signals that are readable from but not writable to
the Peak200 control. The input coils available are listed below. The input coil will have the value 1 if the
statement in the description column is true and a 0 if false. The "1:" term in the address identifies an input
coil. The Peak200 control supports MODBUS function code 2, which involves reading selected input coils.

Woodward 117
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 6-6. Available Input Coils

Address Description Block Output Name (for OPC)


1:0001 Shutdown Exists (Trip Indication) SHUTDOWNS.ANY_SD.B_NAME
Alarm Exists (Common Alarm
ALARMS.ANY_ALM.B_NAME
1:0002 Indication)
1:0003 Alarm - MPU #1 Failed ALARMS.ANY.SEL_1
1:0004 Alarm - MPU #2 Failed ALARMS.ANY.SEL_2
1:0005 Turbine is Tripped ALARMS.ANY.SEL_3
1:0006 Trip - External Trip SHUTDOWNS.ANY.SEL_1
1:0007 Trip - Loss of Speed Signals SHUTDOWNS.ANY.SEL_4
1:0008 Trip - Overspeed Trip SHUTDOWNS.ANY.SEL_3
1:0009 Trip - ESD Button SHUTDOWNS.ANY.SEL_2
1:0010 Trip - From Modbus
IFACE_OUT_SPEED.RMT_SPD_ENABLED.B_NA
Remote Speed Setpt Is Enabled
1:0011 ME
1:0012 Remote Speed Setpt Is Active IFACE_OUT_SPEED.RMT_SPD_ACTIVE.B_NAME
1:0013 HSS/LSS Remote Control
1:0014 Ramping to Min Governor SPDC.A07_STEP.SFC_STEP
1:0015 Ramping to Idle SPDC.A01_STEP.SFC_STEP
1:0016 Overspeed Test In progress IFACE_OUT_SPEED.OSPD_TEST_EN.B_NAME
1:0017 Speed PID In Control IFACE_OUT_VLV.ACT_LSS_SEL_1.B_NAME
1:0018 Speed Sensor Failed Overide ON MPU_OVRD.OVRD1_OR.OR
1:0019 Alarm - Cascade Input Failed ALARMS.ANY.SEL_7
1:0020 Alarm - Stuck in Critical Alarm ALARMS.ANY.SEL_67
1:0021 Remote Speed Setpt Is In Control MESSAGE.RMT_IN_CTL.AND
1:0022 Remote Speed Setpt Is Inhibited RMT_ENBL.RMT_SPD_INH.AND
1:0023 Cascade Is Enabled IFACE_OUT_CASC.ENABLED.B_NAME
IFACE_OUT_SPEED.CASCADE_ENABLED.B_NA
1:0024 Cascade Is Active
ME
1:0025 Cascade Is In Control MESSAGE.CASC_CTL_DELAY.DELAY
1:0026 Cascade Is Inhibited CASC_ENBL.INHIBITED.LATCH1
1:0027 Rmt Cascade Is Enabled IFACE_OUT_CASC.RMT_CAS_EN.B_NAME
1:0028 Rmt Cascade Is Active IFACE_OUT_CASC.REM_CAS_SEL.B_NAME
1:0029 Rmt Cascade Is In Control MESSAGE.CASC_RMT_DELAY.DELAY
1:0030 Rmt Cascade Is Inhibited RMT_CAS_EN.RCASC_IH.LATCH1
1:0031 VLV Limiter Is Open HP_LIMTER.AT_MAX.OR
1:0032 VLV Limiter Is Closed HP_LIMTER.HP_RAMP.P_LIM_1
1:0033 VLV Limiter In Control IFACE_OUT_VLV.ACT_LSS_SEL_2.B_NAME
1:0034 Ready to Start IFACE_OUT_START.SD_CLEAR.B_NAME
1:0035 Discrete Input 1 State CNFG_BI.BI_01_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0036 Discrete Input 2 State CNFG_BI.BI_02_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0037 Discrete Input 3 State CNFG_BI.BI_03_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0038 Discrete Input 4 State CNFG_BI.BI_04_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0039 Discrete Input 5 State CNFG_BI.BI_05_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0040 Discrete Input 6 State CNFG_BI.BI_06_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0041 Discrete Input 7 State CNFG_BI.BI_07_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0042 Discrete Input 8 State CNFG_BI.BI_08_FLEX.BI_FLEX
1:0043 Relay Output 1 State CNFG_BO.RELAY_1.DISPLAY

Woodward 118
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Address Description Block Output Name (for OPC)


1:0044 Relay Output 2 State CNFG_BO.RELAY_2.DISPLAY
1:0045 Relay Output 3 State CNFG_BO.RELAY_3.DISPLAY
1:0046 Relay Output 4 State CNFG_BO.RELAY_4.DISPLAY
1:0047 LN Node 4 DI 1 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_1
1:0048 LN Node 4 DI 2 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_2
1:0049 LN Node 4 DI 3 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_3
1:0050 LN Node 4 DI 4 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_4
1:0051 LN Node 4 DI 5 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_5
1:0052 LN Node 4 DI 6 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_6
1:0053 LN Node 4 DI 7 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_7
1:0054 LN Node 4 DI 8 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_8
1:0055 LN Node 4 DI 9 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_9
1:0056 LN Node 4 DI 10 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_10
1:0057 LN Node 4 DI 11 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_11
1:0058 LN Node 4 DI 12 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_12
1:0059 LN Node 4 DI 13 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_13
1:0060 LN Node 4 DI 14 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_14
1:0061 LN Node 4 DI 15 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_15
1:0062 LN Node 4 DI 16 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_16
1:0063 LN Node 5 DO 1 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_17
1:0064 LN Node 5 DO 2 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_18
1:0065 LN Node 5 DO 3 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_19
1:0066 LN Node 5 DO 4 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_20
1:0067 LN Node 5 DO 5 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_21
1:0068 LN Node 5 DO 6 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_22
1:0069 LN Node 5 DO 7 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_23
1:0070 LN Node 5 DO 8 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_24
1:0071 LN Node 5 DO 9 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_25
1:0072 LN Node 5 DO 10 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_26
1:0073 LN Node 5 DO 11 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_27
1:0074 LN Node 5 DO 12 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_28
1:0075 LN Node 5 DO 13 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_29
1:0076 LN Node 5 DO 14 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_30
1:0077 LN Node 5 DO 15 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_31
1:0078 LN Node 5 DO 16 State MOD_LN_IO.LN_B_STATES.LIST_32
1:0079
1:0080

Woodward 119
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Analog Reads (input registers)—Input registers are analog values that are readable from but not
writable to the Peak200 control. The input registers available are listed below. The value of the input
registers are stored internal to the control as floating point numbers representing engineering units (i.e.,
rpm). The values that are transmitted are integer values ranging from -32767 to +32767. The Peak200
control supports MODBUS function code 4, which involves reading selected input registers.

Table 6-7. Available Input Registers

Address Description Block Output Name (for OPC)


3:0001 Actual Turbine Speed (RPM) MPU.TURB_SPD.A_NAME
3:0002 Speed Setpoint (RPM) SPD_CTRL.SPD_SETPT.A_NAME
IFACE_OUT_SPEED.RMT_SPD_INPUT.A_NAM
3:0003 Remote Speed Setpoint
E
3:0004 Remote Speed Setpoint Input AI_MUX.RMT_SPD_SP.A_NAME
3:0005 VLV Limiter Output x 100 MOD_SCALE.VLV_100.MULTIPLY
3:0006 Speed PID Output (%) x100 MOD_SCALE.SPD_100.MULTIPLY
3:0007 HP Actuator Demand (%) x100 MOD_SCALE.ACT1_HSS.MULTIPLY
3:0008 Process/Cascade PID Output (%) x100 MOD_SCALE.CASC_100.MULTIPLY
3:0009 Process/Cascade Process Value IFACE_IN_CASC.CASC_IN_NAME.A_NAME
3:0010 Process/Cascade Setpoint IFACE_OUT_CASC.CASC_SP.A_NAME
3:0011 MPU Speed Signal 1 CNFG_SPEED.TSS_01.MONITOR
3:0012 MPU Speed Signal 2 CNFG_SPEED.TSS_02.MONITOR
3:0013 Analog Input 1 Value CNFG_AI.AI_01.VALUE_OUT
3:0014 Analog Input 2 Value CNFG_AI.AI_02.VALUE_OUT
3:0015 Analog Input 3 Value CNFG_AI.AI_03.VALUE_OUT
3:0016 Analog Input 4 Value CNFG_AI.AI_04.VALUE_OUT
3:0017 Actuator Output (mA x100) MOD_IO.ACT1_100.MULTIPLY
3:0018 Analog Output 1 Value CNFG_AO.AO_01.VALUE_OUT
3:0019 Analog output 2 Value CNFG_AO.AO_02.VALUE_OUT
3:0020 Analog Output 3 Value CNFG_AO.AO_03.VALUE_OUT
3:0021 LN Node 1 Analog Input 1 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_1
3:0022 LN Node 1 Analog Input 2 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_2
3:0023 LN Node 1 Analog Input 3 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_3
3:0024 LN Node 1 Analog Input 4 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_4
3:0025 LN Node 1 Analog Input 5 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_5
3:0026 LN Node 1 Analog Input 6 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_6
3:0027 LN Node 1 Analog Input 7 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_7
3:0028 LN Node 1 Analog Input 8 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_8
3:0029 LN Node 1 Analog Output 1 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_9
3:0030 LN Node 1 Analog Output 2 Val MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_10
3:0031 LN Node 3 RTD Input 1 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_11
3:0032 LN Node 3 RTD Input 2 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_12
3:0033 LN Node 3 RTD Input 3 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_13
3:0034 LN Node 3 RTD Input 4 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_14
3:0035 LN Node 3 RTD Input 5 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_15
3:0036 LN Node 3 RTD Input 6 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_16
3:0037 LN Node 3 RTD Input 7 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_17
3:0038 LN Node 3 RTD Input 8 Temp MOD_LN_IO.LN_A_VALUES.LIST_18
3:0039 First Out Alarm ALARMS.FIRSTOUT_A.OUT_1

Woodward 120
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Address Description Block Output Name (for OPC)


3:0040 First Out Trip SHUTDOWNS.FIRSTOUT_A.OUT_1
3:0041 Turbine Starts Counter COND_MON.STRT_TURB.A_NAME
3:0042 Total TRIPS Counter COND_MON.SD_NUM.A_NAME
3:0043 TRIPS with Load/Valve > 25% COND_MON.SDLOAD1_NUM.A_NAME
3:0044 TRIPS with Load/Valve > 75% COND_MON.SDLOAD2_NUM.A_NAME
3:0045 Overspeed TRIPS Counter COND_MON.OSPD_NUM.A_NAME
3:0046 Total Run Time Hours COND_MON.TRUNHRS.A_NAME
3:0047 Total Run Hours with Load/Valve > 25% COND_MON.TRUNLDHRS.A_NAME
3:0048 Total Run Hours with Load/Valve > 75% COND_MON.TRUNLD2HRS.A_NAME
3:0049 Spare_49
3:0050 Spare_50

Analog Writes (holding registers)—Holding registers are analog values that are readable from and
writable to the Peak200 control. The holding registers available are listed below. The values transmitted
are integer values ranging from -32767 to + 32767. The Peak200 control supports Modbus function codes
3, 6, and 16. These correspond to read analog output, write single analog output, and write analog
outputs respectively.

Table 6-8. Available Holding Registers

Address Description Multiplier


4:0001 Modbus Entered Speed Setpoint '(1)
4:0002 Modbus Entered Casc Setpoint '(1)
4:0003 '(1)
4:0004 '(1)
4:0005 '(1)

Woodward 121
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 7.
Service Menus

Introduction
Before running the turbine, the Peak200 control must be configured (see Program Mode Worksheets in
the Appendix). After the initial configuration of the unit is complete, the SERVICE MODE parameters can
be viewed and adjusted while the turbine is running.

Figure 7-1. Service Menu

Screen/Key Options Menu


The Alarms menu shows the alarms that have occurred.

 Screen Saver Delay (hr) (*4.0 0.01, 24)


After this amount of time with no keypad commands – activate screen saver

 Disable Screen Saver (No Y/N)


Fully deactivates the screen saver

 Disable Dimming (No Y/N)


Fully deactivates the screen dimming feature

 Auto Login as Operator / Password (Yes – wg1111)


If NO – auto login will be as User Level = Monitor

 Blink Alarm LED upon New Alarm (No Y/N)


If YES – each new alarm will cause LED and Relay to blink whenever a new alarm is triggered

 Internal Operating Temp (degrees C) (status indication only)


Shows internal temperature of the control

 Screen Brightness Level (%) (status indication only)


Adjusted with keypad brightness & adjust keys

Woodward 122
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

 Use 2-second delay on TRIP key? (No Y/N)


If yes – then the TRIP key must be held down for 2 seconds before unit will TRIP

 Use RemoteView TRIP (No Y/N)


If yes – then the TRIP from the Remote View will be active

 Switch to Different Screen after Boot-up (No Y/N)


If selected a menu list will appear for choosing a page that the unit will switch to after it completes a
boot-up cycle (either a power cycle, .wgui restart, or exiting IOLOCK)

 Select Screen
User can select Overview, Speed Control, Valve Demand, Controllers or Distance View

 Enable TRIP on Power-up (No Y/N)


Defaulted to True, unchecking this will disable the TRIP condition that is set upon power-up and
initialization of the control. Unique applications may require this, but it is recommended to be left
checked so that the event log files will show this as a clear indication the control went through a
power cycle.

Speed Control Menu


This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters. These values can be adjusted while the turbine is
running.

 Rate to Minimum Governor Speed ______________


Rate in rpm/sec of speed setpoint ramp up to MinGov speed

 Slow Rate Offline (rpm/sec) ______________


Rate in rpm/sec of speed setpoint adjustment when offline

 Slow Rate Online (rpm/sec) ______________


Rate in rpm/sec of speed setpoint adjustment when online

 Fast Rate Delay (sec) ______________


If discrete raise or lower command is held continuous for more than this time the rate will changed
from slow to fast

 Fast Rate Offline (rpm/sec) ______________


Fast Rate of speed setpoint adjustment when offline

 Fast Rate Online (rpm/sec) ______________


Fast Rate of speed setpoint adjustment when online

 Entered Setpoint Go To Rate (rpm/sec) ______________


Rate of speed setpoint ramp to entered value

 Hot Start Multiplier (Feature Pack Enabled) ______________


Set the multiplier on the Rate To Minimum when a Hot Start is selected.

 Underspeed Setting ______________


Speed setpoint for activating the Underspeed switch relay output

 Online Speed Deadband ______________


Adds a deadband (in rpm) to the PID control

Woodward 123
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


 Speed Droop (%) ______________
Adds actuator droop (converted to rpm) to the PID control. It will calculate the droop value as
Droop% * Min Gov Setpoint * Valve Demand and subtract this value from the setpoint. This is
typically left at 0% (default) for mechanical drive applications. When this is used – an offset will
always exist between the Setpoint and the Speed.

 Display Gauge Multiplier ______________


Changes the multiplier on the Speed Control speed indication gauge

 Speed Switch to Online dynamics ______________


Speed at which speed control dynamics switch from Offline to Online

 Use Reduced Overspeed Setpoint ______________


Allows the use of a separate variable for overspeed tests and enables Overspeed Trip function within
the MinGov to Max Gov speed range

 Reduced Overspeed Setpoint (rpm) ______________


Temporary overspeed trip value – control will only allow this value to be equal to or lower than the
configured Overspeed trip setting

Valve Demand Menu


This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters. These values can be adjusted while the turbine is
running.

 HP Limiter Maximum (%) ______________


Sets the upper limit of the valve limiter demand

 HP Limiter Entered Value Rate (%/sec) ______________


Rate in %/sec of the valve limiter ramp to an entered value

 HP Limiter Raise/Lower Rate (%/sec) ______________


Rate in %/sec of the valve limiter ramp to raise/lower commands

 Use HP Start Limiter? ______________


Limits the valve limiter output until speed control is reached – once in speed control the limiter will
automatically ramp up to the maximum

 HP Max Limiter on Start (%) ______________


Sets the upper limit of the valve limiter demand until speed control is reached

 Use HP Manual Valve Demand ______________


Allows temporary manual valve control for troubleshooting

 HP Manual Demand Rate (%/sec) ______________


Rate at which ramp adjustments to the manual valve demand will move

 Manual Demand Timeout Limit (sec) ______________


Time after which manual demand will automatically be disabled

Woodward 124
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Real Time Clock Menu


This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters for the real time clock functionality. These values
can be adjusted while the turbine is running.

 Use SNTP Synchronization? ______________


Yes to use – must have an Ethernet connection to the plant LAN
No – set time manually from this page

 Time Zone ______________


Rate in rpm/sec of speed setpoint adjustment when offline
** If a Half hour is required to match your time zone – use the Winpanel tool in Control Assistant and
adjust the following parameter to *TRUE
(PEAK200_IO.USE_HALF.CTRL)

 SNTP IP address ______________


Set the LAN IP address for the clock synchronization

 SNTP Rate (sec) ______________


Set time rate at which the control will sync to the LAN clock

 SNTP Timeout (sec) ______________


Set the timeout for a fault indication if no LAN sync is received (should be equal to or longer than
SNTP Rate)

 SNTP Fault (status indication only)


Status of the SNTP connection from control to LAN

If SNTP is not used -


 Year ______________
Set the year for the real time clock

 Month ______________
Set the month for the real time clock

 Day ______________
Set the day for the real time clock

 Hour ______________
Set the hour for the real time clock

 Minutes ______________
Set the minutes for the real time clock

 Seconds ______________
Set the seconds for the real time clock

Once the above values are set, the SET CLOCK soft key button will set the control real time clock to
these settings. If a discrete input pulse is used (instead of SNTP) to synchronize the Peak200 clock with
other devices, set the Hours/Minutes/Seconds to the correct time this pulse will be received and then
Save Settings with this value.

For example, if the DI sync pulse will be sent to the control every day at 2:30 am, then set the Hours to 2,
Minutes to 30 and Seconds to 0.

Woodward 125
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Cascade Control Menu


This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters of the Process/Cascade control loop, if configured
to use this option. These values can be adjusted while the turbine is running.

 Slow Rate (units/sec) ______________


Rate in units/sec of cascade setpoint adjustment

 Fast Rate Delay (sec) ______________


If discrete raise or lower command is held continuous for more than this time, the rate will changed
from slow to fast

 Fast Rate (units/sec) ______________


Fast Rate of cascade setpoint adjustment

 Entered Rate (units/sec) ______________


Rate of cascade setpoint ramp to the entered value

 Droop (%) ______________


Percent of droop added to process signal (this will create an offset between the control PV and the
actual setpoint)

 Rated Cascade Setpoint (units) ______________


If droop is used, the setpoint for maximum % setting

 Cascade Not Matched Rate (units/sec) ______________


Rate at which setpoint will move when remote setpoint does not equal the current setpoint

 Maximum Speed Rate (rpm/sec) ______________


Maximum rate that process/cascade output will move the speed setpoint ramp

 Minimum Speed Setpoint (rpm) ______________


Lowest speed to which the cascade output can drive speed setpoint

 Maximum Speed Setpoint (rpm) ______________


Highest speed to which the cascade output can drive speed setpoint

 Cascade Deadband (%) ______________


Percent deadband of process value to cascade PID

 Display Gauge Multiplier ______________


Changes the multiplier on the Cascade Control process variable indication gauge

Woodward 126
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Communications Menu
This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters of the communication ports. These values can be
adjusted while the turbine is running.

 Use Modbus Trip ______________


Enable (Yes) or Disable (No) allowing a TRIP command from the Modbus link

 Enable Link 1 (Serial) Writes? ______________


Allows write commands to be entered from this device

 Enable Link 2 (Ethernet) Writes? ______________


Allows write commands to be entered from this device

 Time out delay for Link 1 (Serial) ______________


This indicates the amount of time that the link will attempt to communicate before annunciating that a
link error exists.

 Time out delay for Link 2 (Ethernet) ______________


This indicates the amount of time that the link will attempt to communicate before annunciating that a
link error exists.

MPU Override Menu


This menu is used to set the Service mode parameters of the MPU override actions. These values can be
adjusted while the turbine is running.

 Use MPU Override Timer? ______________


Enables the use of override timer once Start has been initiated

 Override Time (sec)? ______________


Sets the time the override will be active once Start has been initiated

 Override Time remaining (status only) ______________


Enables the use of override timer once Start has been initiated

 Use Rolldown Override? ______________


Enables the use of the rolldown override during a controlled shutdown

 Rolldown Speed (rpm) ______________


Speed at which the override will come on (must be above failed speed level)

 Rolldown Delay (sec)? ______________


Speed must be below rolldown speed for this amount of time before override will come on

 Status of MPU Override is also shown

Woodward 127
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Operation Log Menu


This menu has accumulated turbine operational information. These values are maintained during power
cycles and are only lost if the GAP application is updated (by a service pack/service bulletin) or if the
control fails.

These values can be preset or overwritten in configuration mode. For example, to track turbine operation
between outages or overhauls or to preset the values for a spare unit if the control is updated or replaced.

 Number of Turbine Starts (status indication only)


Total number of turbine starts

 Total of Turbine Trips (status indication only)


Total number of turbine trips

 Total of Turbine Trips with Load/Valve > 25% (status indication only)
Total number of turbine trips at low load

 Total of Turbine Trips with Load/Valve > 75% (status indication only)
Total number of turbine trips at high load

 Overspeed Trips (status indication only)


Total number of turbine overspeed trips

 Total Run Time Hours (status indication only)


Total hours of turbine runtime

 Run Time Hours with Load (Valve) > 25% (status indication only)
Total hours of turbine runtime at low load

 Run Time Hours with Load (Valve) > 75% (status indication only)
Total hours of turbine runtime at high load

 Peak Speed Reached (status indication only)


Maximum speed registered by the control

 Maximum Acceleration Reached (status indication only)


Maximum acceleration registered by the control

Woodward 128
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 8.
Troubleshooting

General
This manual documents most problems you will encounter. Use the index to locate the sections of the
manual that may describe your problem. This troubleshooting section contains a description of the
diagnostic programs as well as a few troubleshooting guidelines that our field service technicians and
engineers have suggested.

User Level Password


Operator – Default password: wg1111
Intended for normal turbine operation – default mode
Screen saver initiates to this level

Service – Default password: wg1112


Allows tuning of parameters, while turbine is running (PID dynamics) and entering of Calibration Mode

Configure – Default password: wg1113


Highest user authority / can enter any Mode

ServiceUser –
Login as ServiceUser (no autofill key available must be entered manually):
Login: ServiceUser
Password: ServiceUser@1

This is the highest level of authority in the control program and will give access to all available parameters
that are found in Service and Configure user levels.

Diagnostics
If after power-up if the correct bootup sequence (as shown in Power Up Screen section of Chapter 5) is
not successful, the following information can be helpful in troubleshooting the most probable cause of the
problem.

Hardware or Operating System Problems -


When the control is powered on the microprocessor will begin executing a variety of internal diagnostic
checks, initialize the OS and launch the application software programs. Initially the front panel CPU LED
will be RED, once the complete boot-up is complete this LED will illuminate. The CPU LED remains on as
long as the microprocessor is running. This LED is controlled in hardware by a watchdog timer circuit and
under normal operating conditions, should never turn off. If an error is found during bootup, or if during
operation the microprocessor stops executing at any time, the watchdog timer will time out and the CPU
LED will turn to RED. If this happens the I/O Lockout will be activated, which will also illuminate RED, all
discrete outputs and all analog outputs.

The CPU board runs diagnostics that display troubleshooting messages through the debug Service Port
and AppManager. Additional information on diagnostics tests, subsequent LED flash codes, and serial
port messages is contained in the VxWorks manual.

Table 8-1 shows the CPU fault LED flash codes:

Woodward 129
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table 8-1. CPU LED Flash codes

Failure Flash Code


CPU not operational, IOLOCK state Solid Red
RAM Test Failure 2, 1
FPGA Test Failure 2, 9
Watchdog not enabled 2, 10
RAM drive error 2, 11
Flash drive error 2, 12

If the CPU LED is RED or flashing, the only way to re-boot the microprocessor is to turn off the power to
the control and then turn the power back on.

Application Software Problems -


When the control is powered on or when it is rebooting after being configured, the software performs
several diagnostic tests. If an application software problem is found during this testing, the CPU LED on
the front panel will be GREEN, but the IOLOCK LED is RED. The control will annunciate the error by
sending specific messages to a system log file that can be accessed with AppManager. Some of the
messages will appear in the status window of AppManager which could help troubleshoot the issue.

If after rebooting, the CPU LED on the front panel is GREEN, the IOLOCK LED is off, but the display
shows the ‘splash screen’ or it shows red X’s and question marks where the parameter data should be
(as shown below), this indicates a problem with launching of the display application software (GUI).
Connect the AppManager program and switch to the GUI view window to access information as to the
probable cause.

Figure 8-1. GAP-to-GUI communication problem

The software in this control is user configurable. Before running the control, make sure that the software
is configured properly for your application. See Chapter 4. The chart below gives specific steps for
troubleshooting possible symptoms.

Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom:
All keypad LED’s are off and display is blank.

Possible Causes:
 Power supply input wiring is incorrect.
 Power supply input voltage is not present.
 Power supply fuse is blown.

Solution:
Check the possible causes listed above.

Woodward 130
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Symptom:
CPU LED is GREEN, IOLOCK LED is RED, and GUI screen shows RED locks where data should be

Possible Causes:
 GAP Control Application program is stopped
 GAP Control Application program is not running due to an fault
 The microprocessor has stopped because of a hardware failure.

Solutions:
 Check the application status using AppManager to connect to the control.
 Start the application, it may have been stopped to configure LAN settings or to install a service pack
or new application
 If status box shows application error – use AppManager to ‘Retrieve System Log Files’
 Cycle the input power off for several seconds and then back on. If the unit does not successfully
reboot, then the hardware has failed and must be returned to the factory.

Symptom:
Discrete outputs are not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 The IOLOCK LED is on activating the I/O Lock mechanism.
 The Normally Open/Normally Closed jumper options are not properly selected.
 +24 Volt power supply is shorted or bad.
 The software is not configured properly.

Solutions:
 Remove the wiring and use an ohmmeter to check for proper contact closure. If the meter indicates
the output is working properly, then there is a problem with the field wiring.
 Check the IOLOCK LED on the front door. If it is on, determine if unit is in Configuration Mode or if
application is running (using AppManager)
 Check the software to see what control is telling the outputs to do. Go to Relays from the HOME
page and view the status LED of each channel. Also look at the Details of any specific channel in
question to verify whether the active state of the Function defined as been inverted
 Use the Calibration mode to Force the relay state output and verify proper functioning of the internal
relay

Symptom:
Discrete inputs are not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 The internal +24 Volt power supply is shorted or bad.
 The external power supply is bad or is wired incorrectly.

Solutions:
 Make sure that the wiring is correct. Refer to Figures x-x and x-x to see how the contacts and power
supplies should be wired.
 If the internal +24 V power supply is used, check the voltage at the Discrete Input (DIN) terminal
block connectors as per the wiring label.
 If an external power supply is used, check it to make sure the voltage is correct. Refer to Figures x-x
and x-x to see how the contacts and power supplies should be wired.
 Check the software to see what it senses at the inputs. Go to Contact Inputs from the HOME page
and view the status LED of each channel. Also look at the Details of any specific channel in question
to verify whether the active state of the Function defined as been inverted

Woodward 131
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Symptom:
Analog outputs are not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 The IOLOCK LED is on, activating the I/O Lock mechanism.
 Excessive load at device end (600 ohm max)
 The software is not configured properly.

Solutions:
 Make sure that the wiring is correct. Refer to Figure x-x to see how the analog outputs should be
wired.
 Remove the wiring from these terminals and check /verify that the +24 V power supply voltages at
the AO terminal block is present with no wires connected to the field. If it is correct, the field wiring is
shorting it out.
 Check the front IOLOCK LED. If on, the unit is in IOLOCK due to being in Configuration mode or
IOLOCK has been initiated by a hardware fault. Cycle the input power and verify if the unit reboots
properly. This will reset the I/O Lock mechanism.
 Check what the software is telling the outputs to do. Go to Analog Outputs from the HOME page and
view the status LED and current readback value of each channel.
 Use the Calibration mode to Force the analog output and verify proper functioning of the channel in
question

Symptom:
Actuator output is not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 +24 Volt power supply is shorted or bad.
 The IOLOCK LED is on, activating the I/O Lock.
 The 0–200 mA/0–20 mA configuration option is not properly selected.
 Excessive load at device end (600 ohms low range / 65 ohms high range)
 The software is not configured properly.

Solutions:
 Make sure that the wiring is correct. Refer to Figure x-x to see how the actuator output should be
wired.
 Check the front IOLOCK LED. If on, the unit is in IOLOCK due to being in Configuration mode or
IOLOCK has been initiated by a hardware fault. Cycle the input power and verify if the unit reboots
properly. This will reset the I/O Lock mechanism.
 Check the configuration of the current range to make sure it is correct.
 Remove the wiring from these terminals and check /verify that the +24 V power supply voltages at the
ACT terminal block is present with no wires connected to the field. If it is correct, the field wiring is
shorting it out.
 Check the software to see what it is telling the output to do. Go to Driver menu from the HOME page
and view the status LED and current readback value of each channel.
 Use the Calibration mode to Force the actuator driver output and verify proper functioning of the
channel in question

Symptom:
Speed sensor inputs are not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 The magnetic pickup is not functioning properly. Only MPU’s are supported
 Configuration of teeth/gear ratio is incorrect

Woodward 132
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Solutions:
 Make sure that the wiring is correct. Refer to Figure xx-xx to see examples of recommended speed
sensor inputs wiring.
 Check the magnetic pickup. It must provide at least a 200 Hz, 1 Vrms signal. If the voltage is low
adjust the gap on the probe to increase the signal voltage
 Check the software to see what it senses at the inputs. To do this, go to the Analog Inputs/Speed
Signal menu from the HOME page and view the current values seen by the control. Use a calibrated
frequency generated signal to confirm the control input

Symptom:
Analog input is not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Incorrect wiring.
 The 4–20 mA option for internal loop power or external power are not properly selected.
 External power supply is bad.

Solutions:
 Make sure that the wiring is correct. Refer to Figure xx-x to see how the analog inputs should be
wired.
 Check/verify that the correct configuration option is selected as loop powered for internal power
(from control) or unselected for self-powered or externally powered transmitters.
 If internal power is used (loop powered = yes), remove the wiring from these terminals and check
/verify that the +24 V power supply voltage exists at the AIN terminal block (P and -) is present with
no wires connected to the field. If it is correct, the field wiring is shorting it out.
 Check the software to see what it senses at the input. To do this, go to the Analog Inputs menu from
the HOME page and view the current values seen by the control for the channel in question.
 If external power is used for the transmitter, use a mA current source meter to verify the signal and
correct range into the control. If this operates correctly, the issue is in the field side of the wiring or
the transmitter device.

Symptom:
Operator Control Panel not operating correctly.

Possible Causes:
 Screen brightness has been reduced too low
 GUI application was stopped via AppManager (perhaps to change languages)
 GUI application did not initialize correctly
 Screen or backlight fault

Solutions:
 Check the screen brightness to insure it has not been turned all the way down
 Check the ALARM view summary to see if the control has annunciated a Display Backlight Fault (ID
= 14)
 Verify that HOME key will return the unit to correct screen
 Check to see if the RemoteView tool will function correctly
 Check using AppManager verify that the GUI program is running
 Check using AppManager if any status messages are present in the GAP or GUI view window

The CPU LED should always be on and GREEN. If it is not, see the
"CPU Flash codes in the diagnostic section": Typically if it is solid
RED or giving a flash code, it will require a power cycle to possibly
clear the issue.

Woodward 133
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Alarms / Shutdowns
If the control shuts down due to a CPU fault or watchdog timer failure, indicated by the CPU LED being
RED or off, you must turn off control power then turn the power back on.

After any shutdown, reset the Shutdown relay contacts to ensure proper start-up.

Wiring / Component Problems


Most Peak200 control problems are caused by wiring problems. Carefully and thoroughly check all wiring
connections at both ends. Be very careful when installing wires into the Peak200 control terminal blocks.
Check all shields for proper grounding at the control end only.

You can measure all inputs and outputs directly at the terminal strips. The display screen for each
channel will show what the Peak200 control measures. This comparison will tell you if the Peak200
control is interpreting the input signal correctly.

EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not connect or disconnect while circuit is


live unless area is known to be non-hazardous.

Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division


or Zone applications.

RISQUE D’EXPLOSION—Ne pas raccorder ni débrancher


tant que l’installation est sous tension, sauf en cas
l’ambiance est décidément non dangereuse.

La substitution de composants peut rendre ce matériel


inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe I,
applications Division ou Zone.

Actuators / Control Adjustments


If the actuator output is unsteady or hunts, try limiting the steam valve by closing the valve ramp, or if
needed enter manual valve demand mode to temporarily lock the output demand to the actuator. If you
limit the demand to the steam valve in this manner and the actuator output is steady but the turbine still
hunts, then the problem is outside the governor. If an actuator hunts, it may need dither (especially TM
type).

If the Peak200 control is not able to fully close or open the actuator, check to make sure that the actuator
is calibrated correctly. If the Peak200 control is not able to control speed above or below a certain speed,
the steam valve may not be adjusted correctly. An indication of this is if the control is calling for minimum
actuator but the speed is still climbing or staying the same, or if the control is calling for maximum
actuator but the speed will not increase. Shut down the control and verify that the actuator is closed. If it
is, then partially open the T&T valve and verify that the turbine does not turn.

If the T&T valve allows the turbine to turn, then the T&T steam valve is not seating properly to close off
steam supply to the turbine.

Woodward 134
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Other Operating Problems


If actual speed is less than the speed called for by the speed reference, check for speed droop. Droop
causes the actual speed to be less than the speed reference.

If the Remote Speed input values are reading incorrectly, ensure the input wire shielding is properly
grounded at the Peak200 control end only.

Woodward 135
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Chapter 9.
Product Support and Service Options

Do not attempt to service internal electronic components nor attempt to


remove any of the circuit boards. If the control requires repair, contact
Woodward or your nearest Woodward authorized service facility.
The field-configured portion of the program will be zeroed out after
factory repair. To prevent damage to your equipment, you must
reconfigure the Program Mode before the unit is put back into service.

Product Support Options


If you are experiencing problems with the installation, or unsatisfactory performance of a Woodward
product, the following options are available:
 Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.
 Contact the manufacturer or packager of your system.
 Contact the Woodward Full-Service Distributor serving your area.
 Contact Woodward technical assistance (see “How to Contact Woodward” later in this chapter) and
discuss your problem. In many cases, your problem can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can
select which course of action to pursue based on the available services listed in this chapter.

OEM or Packager Support: Many Woodward controls and control devices are installed into the equipment
system and programmed by an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) or Equipment Packager at their
factory. In some cases, the programming is password-protected by the OEM or packager, and they are the
best source for product service and support. Warranty service for Woodward products shipped with an
equipment system should also be handled through the OEM or Packager. Please review your equipment
system documentation for details.

Woodward Business Partner Support: Woodward works with and supports a global network of
independent business partners whose mission is to serve the users of Woodward controls, as described
here:
 A Full Service Distributor has the primary responsibility for sales, service, system integration
solutions, technical desk support, and aftermarket marketing of standard Woodward products within
a specific geographic area and market segment.
 An Authorized Independent Service Facility (AISF) provides authorized service that includes repairs,
repair parts, and warranty service on Woodward's behalf. Service (not new unit sales) is an AISF's
primary mission.
 A Recognized Turbine Retrofitter (RTR) is an independent company that does both steam and gas
turbine control retrofits and upgrades globally, and can provide the full line of Woodward systems
and components for the retrofits and overhauls, long term service contracts, emergency repairs, etc.

A current list of Woodward Business Partners is available at www.woodward.com/directory.

Product Service Options


The following factory options for servicing Woodward products are available through your local Full-
Service Distributor or the OEM or Packager of the equipment system, based on the standard Woodward
Product and Service Warranty (5-01-1205) that is in effect at the time the product is originally shipped
from Woodward or a service is performed:
 Replacement/Exchange (24-hour service)
 Flat Rate Repair
 Flat Rate Remanufacture

Woodward 136
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Replacement/Exchange: Replacement/Exchange is a premium program designed for the user who is in
need of immediate service. It allows you to request and receive a like-new replacement unit in minimum
time (usually within 24 hours of the request), providing a suitable unit is available at the time of the
request, thereby minimizing costly downtime. This is a flat-rate program and includes the full standard
Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and Service Warranty 5-01-1205).

This option allows you to call your Full-Service Distributor in the event of an unexpected outage, or in
advance of a scheduled outage, to request a replacement control unit. If the unit is available at the time of
the call, it can usually be shipped out within 24 hours. You replace your field control unit with the like-new
replacement and return the field unit to the Full-Service Distributor.

Charges for the Replacement/Exchange service are based on a flat rate plus shipping expenses. You are
invoiced the flat rate replacement/exchange charge plus a core charge at the time the replacement unit is
shipped. If the core (field unit) is returned within 60 days, a credit for the core charge will be issued.

Flat Rate Repair: Flat Rate Repair is available for the majority of standard products in the field. This
program offers you repair service for your products with the advantage of knowing in advance what the
cost will be. All repair work carries the standard Woodward service warranty (Woodward Product and
Service Warranty 5-01-1205) on replaced parts and labor.

Flat Rate Remanufacture: Flat Rate Remanufacture is very similar to the Flat Rate Repair option with
the exception that the unit will be returned to you in “like-new” condition and carry with it the full standard
Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and Service Warranty 5-01-1205). This option is
applicable to mechanical products only.

Returning Equipment for Repair


If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned for repair, please contact your Full-
Service Distributor in advance to obtain Return Authorization and shipping instructions.

When shipping the item(s), attach a tag with the following information:
 Return authorization number
 Name and location where the control is installed
 Name and phone number of contact person
 Complete Woodward part number(s) and serial number(s)
 Description of the problem
 Instructions describing the desired type of repair

Packing a Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
 Protective caps on any connectors
 Antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules
 Packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit
 At least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing material
 A packing carton with double walls
 A strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength

To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper


handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual
82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.

Woodward 137
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Replacement Parts
When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
 The part number(s) (XXXX-XXXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate
 The unit serial number, which is also on the nameplate

Engineering Services
Woodward offers various Engineering Services for our products. For these services, you can contact us by
telephone, by email, or through the Woodward website.
 Technical Support
 Product Training
 Field Service

Technical Support is available from your equipment system supplier, your local Full-Service Distributor, or
from many of Woodward’s worldwide locations, depending upon the product and application. This service can
assist you with technical questions or problem solving during the normal business hours of the Woodward
location you contact. Emergency assistance is also available during non-business hours by phoning
Woodward and stating the urgency of your problem.

Product Training is available as standard classes at many of our worldwide locations. We also offer
customized classes, which can be tailored to your needs and can be held at one of our locations or at
your site. This training, conducted by experienced personnel, will assure that you will be able to maintain
system reliability and availability.

Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product and location, from many
of our worldwide locations or from one of our Full-Service Distributors. The field engineers are
experienced both on Woodward products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which
our products interface.

For information on these services, please contact us via telephone, email us, or use our website:
www.woodward.com.

Contacting Woodward’s Support Organization


For the name of your nearest Woodward Full-Service Distributor or service facility, please consult our
worldwide directory at www.woodward.com/directory, which also contains the most current product
support and contact information.

You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department at one of the following Woodward
facilities to obtain the address and phone number of the nearest facility at which you can obtain
information and service.

Products Used in Products Used in Products Used in Industrial


Electrical Power Systems Engine Systems Turbomachinery Systems
Facility --------------- Phone Number Facility --------------- Phone Number Facility --------------- Phone Number
Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800
China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727 China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727 China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727
Germany: Germany ------ +49 (711) 78954-510 India --------------- +91 (124) 4399500
Kempen---- +49 (0) 21 52 14 51 India --------------- +91 (124) 4399500 Japan---------------+81 (43) 213-2191
Stuttgart - +49 (711) 78954-510 Japan---------------+81 (43) 213-2191 Korea ---------------+82 (51) 636-7080
India --------------- +91 (124) 4399500 Korea ---------------+82 (51) 636-7080 The Netherlands--+31 (23) 5661111
Japan---------------+81 (43) 213-2191 The Netherlands--+31 (23) 5661111 Poland -------------- +48 12 295 13 00
Korea ---------------+82 (51) 636-7080 United States -----+1 (970) 482-5811 United States -----+1 (970) 482-5811
Poland -------------- +48 12 295 13 00
United States -----+1 (970) 482-5811

Woodward 138
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Technical Assistance
If you need to contact technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information. Please
write it down here before contacting the Engine OEM, the Packager, a Woodward Business Partner, or
the Woodward factory:

General
Your Name

Site Location

Phone Number

Fax Number

Prime Mover Information


Manufacturer

Turbine Model Number

Type of Fuel (gas, steam, etc.)

Power Output Rating


Application (power generation, marine,
etc.)
Control/Governor Information
Control/Governor #1

Woodward Part Number & Rev. Letter

Control Description or Governor Type

Serial Number

Control/Governor #2

Woodward Part Number & Rev. Letter

Control Description or Governor Type

Serial Number

Control/Governor #3

Woodward Part Number & Rev. Letter

Control Description or Governor Type

Serial Number

Symptoms
Description

If you have an electronic or programmable control, please have the adjustment setting positions or the
menu settings written down and with you at the time of the call.

Woodward 139
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix A
Configuration Mode Worksheets

Introduction
The program mode worksheets provide a quick reference for programming the Peak200 control. On the
system documentation CD there is an Excel Spreadsheet with the Configuration and Service information
that can be used to document all settings for your system. Recommend doing this or record your system
settings here in this manual.

EXPLOSION HAZARD—The Peak200 control box should not be


opened when a hazardous atmosphere is present. Wiring
connections which could cause sparks are exposed inside the
cabinet.

Errors in configuration or programming of the Peak200 control may


create dangerous overspeed conditions. The turbine must be
equipped with an overspeed device completely separate from the
Peak200 control or actuators attached to the Peak200 control. The
turbine must never be run when this device is not present or not
operating correctly.

To prevent damage to the turbine resulting from improper control


settings, make sure you save the set points before removing power.
Failure to save the set points before removing power causes them to
revert to the previously saved settings. Dangerous conditions such
as turbine overspeed may result from operating the turbine with
incorrect settings, possibly resulting in equipment damage and
injury or death of personnel.

Do NOT attempt to operate the turbine until the Peak200 control has
been programmed. To do so could cause equipment damage.

Woodward 140
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Control Part Number/Revision __________________________________

Control Serial Number __________________________________

Application __________________________________

Site Information –
This information is a free form text entry that can be entered or modified at any time. This is also the
location to find the software part numbers running on the control, the GAP runs the control (I/O)
application and the WGUI controls the graphical user interface screens

GAP Application ID __________________________________

WGUI Application ID __________________________________

Customer Site Name __________________________________

Location __________________________________

Unit ID ___________________________________

Configure Mode Program


(Shut down the turbine prior to entering this mode.)

TURBINE START
Manual Start YES/NO
Automatic Start YES/NO

Valve Limiter Raise/Lower Rate %/sec


Use Idle/MinGov Sequence <status>
Use Confirmation on Keypad Start?
Idle Speed Setpoint rpm
Minimum Governor Setpoint rpm
Rate to MinGov rpm/sec
Use Ramp to Idle

SPEED SIGNALS
Device Tag (MPU 1)
Number of Gear Teeth (MPU 1)
Gear Ratio (MPU 1) :
Maximum Speed Level (MPU 1) rpm
Failed Speed Level (MPU 1) rpm

Use Speed Input #2? YES/NO


Device Tag (MPU 2)
Number of Gear Teeth (MPU 2)
Gear Ratio (MPU 2) : rpm
Maximum Speed Level (MPU 2) rpm
Failed Speed Level (MPU 2) rpm

Woodward 141
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

SPEED SETPOINTS
Overspeed Test Limit rpm
Overspeed Trip Setpoint rpm
Max Governor Speed rpm
Min Governor Speed rpm
Underspeed Setpoint rpm

Use Remote Speed Setpoint? YES/NO


Remote Speed Setpt Max Rate rpm/sec
Rmt Spd Setpt Not Matched Rate rpm/sec
Use DI Enable/Disable as
Momentary? YES/NO

Use Critical Speed Avoidance? YES/NO


Critical Speed Rate rpm/sec
Critical Speed 1 Minimum rpm
Critical Speed 1 Maximum rpm

COMMUNICATIONS
Ethernet (ENET) 1 Address IP
Ethernet (ENET) 1 Subnet Mask IP
Gateway Address IP
Use Modbus Communications? YES/NO
Use Serial Port (Modbus Link 1)? YES/NO

Use Ethernet Port 1 (Modbus Link 2)? YES/NO

If Serial Port is used:


Modbus Device Address (slave #) 1-247
Enable Write Commands from Serial? YES/NO
Protocol (ASCII, RTU)
Port #1 Baud Rate
Port #1 Data Bits 7, 8
Port #1 Stop Bits 1,1.5,2
Port #1 Parity O/E/none
Port #1 Driver 232/485

If Ethernet Port 1 is used:


Ethernet Protocol (Modbus Link 2) TCP/UDP
Modbus Device Address (slave #) 1-247
Enable Write Commands from ENET? YES/NO

Woodward 142
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

PROCESS/CASCADE
Use Process/Cascade Control? YES/NO
Minimum Cascade Setpoint Units
Maximum Cascade Setpoint Units
Cascade Setpoint Rate Units/sec
Use Cascade Setpoint Tracking? YES/NO
Invert Cascade? YES/NO

Speed Setpoint Lower Limit rpm


Speed Setpoint Upper Limit rpm
Max Speed Setpoint Rate rpm/sec
Cascade Droop %
Cascade PID Prop Gain
Cascade PID Integral Gain
Cascade Derivative Ratio (SDR)

Use Remote Casc Setting YES/NO


Remote Casc Max Rate Units/sec
Cascade Units of Measure
Decimals Displayed on Display

Woodward 143
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

ANALOG INPUTS
Analog Input #1 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Loop Powered? YES/NO
Engineering Units
Modbus Multiplier 0.01 -100
Decimals Display on Screen 0-3
Gain
Offset
Analog Input #2 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Loop Powered? YES/NO
Engineering Units
Modbus Multiplier 0.01 -100
Decimals Display on Screen 0-3
Gain
Offset
Analog Input #3 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Loop Powered? YES/NO
Engineering Units
Modbus Multiplier 0.01 -100
Decimals Display on Screen 0-3
Gain
Offset
Analog Input #4 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Loop Powered? YES/NO
Engineering Units
Modbus Multiplier 0.01 -100
Decimals Display on Screen 0-3
Gain
Offset

Woodward 144
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

CONTACT INPUTS
Contact Input #1 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #2 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #3 -
Input Function Ext Trip 1
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES

Contact Input #4 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #5 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #6 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #7 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Contact Input #8 -
Input Function
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO

Woodward 145
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

ANALOG OUTPUTS
Analog Output #1 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Engineering Units
Enable Readback Fault YES/NO
Gain
Offset
Analog Output #2 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Engineering Units
Enable Readback Fault YES/NO
Gain
Offset
Analog Output #3 -
Value at 4 mA
Value at 20 mA
Input Function
Device Tag
Engineering Units
Enable Readback Fault YES/NO
Gain
Offset

Woodward 146
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

RELAY OUTPUTS
RELAY #1
Output Function TRIP
Device Tag
Invert Logic? NO
Reset Clears Trip Relay Output? YES/NO
Include External Trips in Relay? YES/NO
Trip will set ACT to 0 mA? YES/NO
RELAY #2
Output Function (State / Level Switch)
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO
Use as Level Switch? YES/NO
Level ON
Level OFF
RELAY #3
Output Function (State / Level Switch)
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO
Use as Level Switch? YES/NO
Level ON
Level OFF
RELAY #4
Output Function (State / Level Switch)
Device Tag
Invert Logic? YES/NO
Use as Level Switch? YES/NO
Level ON
Level OFF

DRIVER (Actuator Output)


mA Value at 0% Demand
mA Value at 100% Demand
Actuator Function HP Dmd
Actuator Range (0-20 / 0-200)
Dither (mA)
Device Tag
Use Actuator Fault as Shutdown YES/NO
Invert Actuator Output? YES/NO
Gain
Offset
Use Self-Powered Actuator YES/NO
MPU OVRD to this % of MinSpd %
Self-Powered Time Delay (sec) sec

Woodward 147
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Channel Events (Under each AI)


AI Chan 1
Use Alarm Setpoint 1? YES/NO
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? YES/NO
Use Level 2 as a Trip (not alarm) YES/NO
Chan Flt = SD? YES/NO
Chan Fault Delay sec
Level 1 Setpoint units
Invert Action at Level 1? YES/NO
Level 2 Setpoint units
Invert Action at Level 2? YES/NO
Setpoint Hysteresis units
Delay for Event action sec
Enable Speed Setpoint rpm
Speed Setpoint Hysteresis rpm

AI Chan 2
Use Alarm Setpoint 1? YES/NO
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? YES/NO
Use Level 2 as a Trip (not alarm) YES/NO
Chan Flt = SD? YES/NO
Chan Fault Delay (sec)
Level 1 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 1? YES/NO
Level 2 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 2? YES/NO
Setpoint Hysteresis
Delay for Event action (sec)
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) rpm
Speed Setpoint Hysteresis rpm

Woodward 148
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Channel Events (Under each AI)


AI Chan 3
Use Alarm Setpoint 1? YES/NO
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? YES/NO
Use Level 2 as a Trip (not alarm) YES/NO
Chan Flt = SD? YES/NO
Chan Fault Delay (sec)
Level 1 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 1? YES/NO
Level 2 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 2? YES/NO
Setpoint Hysteresis
Delay for Event action (sec)
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) rpm
Speed Setpoint Hysteresis rpm

AI Chan 4
Use Alarm Setpoint 1? YES/NO
Use Alarm Setpoint 2? YES/NO
Use Level 2 as a Trip (not alarm) YES/NO
Chan Flt = SD? YES/NO
Chan Fault Delay (sec)
Level 1 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 1? YES/NO
Level 2 Setpoint
Invert Action at Level 2? YES/NO
Setpoint Hysteresis
Delay for Event action (sec)
Enable Speed Setpoint (rpm) rpm
Speed Setpoint Hysteresis rpm

LinkNet Nodes (for additional I/O)


Optional
Enable Using LinkNet HT I/O Nodes? YES/NO
Enable Node 1 (AI/AO)? YES/NO
Enable Node 3 (RTD)? YES/NO
Enable Node 4 (BI)? YES/NO
Enable Node 5 (BO)? YES/NO

Woodward 149
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix B
Service Mode Worksheets

SCREEN/KEY OPTIONS
Screen Saver Delay (hr) hr
Disable Screen Saver? YES/NO
Disable Dimming? YES/NO
Auto Login as Operator? YES/NO
Blink LED upon New Alarm? YES/NO
Internal Operating Temp (Deg C) deg C
Screen Brightness
Use 2 second delay on TRIP key?
Use TRIP key from RemoteView?
Switch to Different Screen after Boot-up YES/NO
Select Screen screen
list
Enable TRIP on Power-up? YES/NO

REALTIME CLOCK
Use SNTP Time Synchronization? YES/NO
Time Zone
SNTP IP Address
SNTP Rate
SNTP Timeout

MPU OVERRIDE
Use MPU Override Timer? YES/NO
Override Time (sec) sec
Override Time Remaining sec
Use Rolldown Override? YES/NO
Rolldown Speed (rpm) rpm
Rolldown Delay (sec) sec

Woodward 150
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

SPEED CONTROL
Rate to Minimum (units/sec) units/sec
Slow Rate Off-Line (rpm/sec)
Slow Rate On-Line (rpm/sec)
Fast Rate Delay (sec) sec
Fast Rate Off-Line (units/sec) units/sec
Fast Rate On-Line (units/sec) units/sec
Entered Setpoint Go to Rate (units/sec) units/sec
Underspeed Setting rpm
On-Line Speed Deadband rpm
Speed Droop (%) %
Display Gauge Multiplier x1
Speed Switch to On-Line Dynamics rpm
Use Reduced Overspeed Setpoint? YES/NO
Reduced Overspeed Setpoint rpm
MPU Speed Probe Difference Alarm
Setpoint rpm

CASCADE CONTROL
Slow Rate (units/sec) units/sec
Fast Rate Delay (sec) sec
Fast Rate (units/sec) units/sec
Entered Rate (units/sec) units/sec
Droop (%) %
Rated Cascade Setpoint (units) units
Cascade Not Matched Rate (units/sec) units/sec
Maximum Speed Rate (rpm/sec) rpm/sec
Minimum Speed Setpoint rpm
Maximum Speed Setpoint rpm
Cascade Deadband %
Display Gauge Multiplier x1

VALVE DEMAND
HP Limiter Maximum (%) %
HP Limiter Entered Value Rate %/sec
HP Valve Limiter Raise/Lower Rate %/sec
Use HP Start Limiter? YES/NO
HP Max Limiter at Start (%) %
Use HP Manual Valve Demand? YES/NO
HP Manual Demand Rate (%/s) %/sec
Manual Demand Timeout Limit sec

COMMUNICATIONS
Use Modbus Trip? YES/NO
Enable Link 1 Writes (Serial)? YES/NO
Enable Link 2 Writes (ENET 1)? YES/NO
Link 1 Timeout Delay (Serial) sec
Link 2 Timeout Delay (Ethernet) sec

Woodward 151
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

OPERATION LOG (View only)


login as ServiceUser/CONFIG mode to rewrite values
Number of Turbine Starts
Total Trips
Trips with Load/Valve > 25%
Trips with Load/Valve > 75%
Overspeed Trips
Total Run Time Hours hrs
Runtime with Load/Valve > 25% hrs
Runtime with Load/Valve > 75% hrs
Peak Speed Reached rpm
Max Acceleration Detected rpm/sec

TRENDS
no user settings - views only

Woodward 152
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix C
Automatic Speed PID Dynamic Analysis

The Automated PID Dynamic Optimizer is a routine which allows the control to automatically analyze the
system and calculate the P, I, and D terms. The PID Optimizer routine can be initiated from the controller
Dynamics Optimizer screen and will provide reasonable and stable results. To calculate optimized system
dynamics, small and progressively larger adjustments are made to the valve demand in order to measure
the turbine system. The optimizer routine remains within user specified process and valve movement
limits to ensure that the turbine system remains within acceptable operating limits.

By running the PID Optimizer, the resulting dynamics provide the following benefits:
1. Improved system response to events such as load changes and load rejection
2. Tighter control at the setpoint
3. Response behavior which matches the control loop and application (offline speed control vs load
control, etc)
4. Improved system diagnostics; The routine provides insight into turbine system control problems
outside of PID tuning and can help to identify them. Some examples include:
a. Non-Linear turbine response due to poppet staging or slew rate limited valve response
b. High system dead-time
c. High signal noise
d. Response time variation due to high system friction, loose linkage, or coupling, varying
hydraulic pressure, or varying steam conditions.

Overview of the Automated PID Optimizer Routine

Figure C-1. Speed PID Dynamic Optimizer

The Dynamics Optimizer screen in Figure C-1 above displays the current status which is overviewed on
the left-hand side of the screen and results are displayed on the right. The menu bar on the bottom of the
screen contains buttons for configuration and operation of the Optimizer routine.

The process of finding optimized system dynamics includes two modes: first the analysis mode and then
the setpoint step mode. The trend below gives an overview of the entire Optimization routine. The
actuator demand displayed in yellow, speed setpoint in white, and speed in red. The left portion of the
trend is the Analysis Mode. The right portion of the trend is the Setpoint Step Mode.

Woodward 153
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure C-2. Speed vs Actuator Trends during analysis

Analysis Mode
During the Analysis Mode, the optimizer begins by making small actuator movements which progressively
increase until the measured process signal movement can be differentiated from signal noise. The initial
movement direction (up or down) depends on system conditions. Once there is enough process signal
movement, the optimizer begins moving the actuator up and down until the process signal moves beyond
the +/- the threshold values (calculated from signal noise) and performs the system analysis to calculate
gains.

On the front panel, the status will progress through the following steps during the Analysis Mode:
 OPID Enabled/Settling
 Analysis Movement
 Movement to Thresholds
 Calculating Gains

Setpoint Step Mode


Once new gains have been calculated for P, I, and D the PID will control at the setpoint using the newly
calculated gains. The routine then performs setpoint step tests to validate the system response.

During the Setpoint Step Mode there are 4 setpoint step tests:
1. Step the setpoint up or down (amount depends on system noise, but less than the Process Limit
configured). Whether it moves up or down depends on the sign of the Process Limit.
2. Step the setpoint back to the initial setpoint
3. Step the setpoint by a higher amount than the first setpoint step test
4. Step the setpoint back to the initial setpoint

At any stage in this mode, if a fault occurs, the optimizer will abort and change the PID gains from the
calculated values back to the initial values.
On the front panel, the status will progress through the following steps during the Setpoint Test Mode:
 Settling at Setpoint
 Step Tests with OPTI Gains
 System Settling
 Complete – Using New Gains

Woodward 154
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Once the routine is complete, the new gains can either be accepted by pressing the ‘Accept’ button within
the Test Menu at the bottom of the screen. Alternatively, the gains can be rejected by pressing the ‘Reset
Test’ button at the bottom of the screen, and the PID gains will change back to the initial values. If
accepted, the current dynamics (offline or online, depending on the current operating mode) will be
updated to the calculated values and the optimizer will reset.

Configuring the Automated PID Optimizer


The configuration parameters are provided in the ‘Configure’ pop-up. The defaults for these values should
allow most systems to successfully optimize. If needed, adjustments can be made to these values to
ensure that the automatic tuning completes successfully. Changing any of these values while the
Optimizer test is running will cause the test to fault and abort.

Figure C-3. Speed PID Optimizer Configuration

Process Limit (rpm) dflt= 50.0 (-200.0, 200.0)


This value limits the process signal movement allowed. If movement occurs during automatic tuning that
is more than this value, the Automated PID Optimizer routine will abort and control at the initial SP. This
value should be set based on what the system can tolerate. If it is too low, the automatic tuning process
may fault and abort due to normal process changes. The limit is centered around the current process
value at the time the optimizer is enabled. The small analysis test steps will be in the direction relative to
the sign of the value, with the default of 50 the small initial steps will be above the current process value.

For example, if the PID Optimizer is calculating Speed PID gains, and the Process Limit is 50 rpm and
current speed signal is 3000RPM
Upper Process Movement Limit: 3000 + 50 = 3050 RPM
Lower Process Movement Limit: 3000 – 50 = 2950 RPM
If the turbine speed moves outside of the Upper Process Movement Limit or Lower Process Movement
Limit, the PID Optimizer routine will be aborted.

Act Limit (offline) (%) dflt= 8.0 (0.25, 100.0)


This value limits how much the actuator demand will move during the Analysis Mode when the turbine is
using Offline dynamics. The percentage will limit the output +/- from the actuator position when the
optimizer is enabled. The optimizer will not abort if this limit is reached, but an alarm will be annunciated.

Act Limit (online) (%) dflt= 10.0 (0.5, 100.0)


This value limits how much the actuator demand will move during the Analysis Mode when the turbine is
using Online dynamics. The percentage will limit the output +/- from the actuator position when the
optimizer is enabled. The optimizer will not abort if this limit is reached, but an alarm will be annunciated.

Woodward 155
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Response Timeout (sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.005, 100.0)


This value determines how long the PID Optimizer will wait for a response during the automatic tuning
process. This value should be at least 2 times longer than the system slew and settling time. During the
Setpoint Step Mode, this value determines the step times and times between steps. A fault and abort will
occur if the total PID optimizer time exceeds a value of 40 times the Response Timeout.

PID Type dflt= PID (P, PI, PID)


This setting determines the mode of the PID controller and allows the automatic tuning of the appropriate
control loop.
 P = Proportional Only
o P Term Calculated
o I Term 0
o D Term is 0.01 if D is less than 1 or 100 if D is greater than 1
 PI = Proportional and Integral
o P Term Calculated
o I Term Calculated
o D Term is 0.01 if DR is less than 1 or 100 if DR is greater than 1
 PID = Proportional, Integral, and Derivative
o P Term Calculated
o I Term Calculated
o D Term Calculated

In addition, even if automatic tuning mode is not enabled, if this is set to P, the PID will switch to a
proportional controller. Note that selecting PI will not switch the PID to a PI controller; this is done by
changing S_D_R.

Fast/Slow dflt= 50 (0, 100)


This value allows for the calculated system response to be more or less aggressive. If faster response
time is needed, this value should be increased. If slower response time is needed, this value should be
decreased.

System Diagnostics
The Automated PID Optimizer has alarm and fault codes that can be generated at various stages. An
alarm being generated will not abort the optimizer and does not mean that the calculated gains are
unreliable. Alarms are given to indicate response conditions that are less than ideal, but might be
acceptable, the user should monitor the response to decide. A fault will abort the Automated PID
Optimizer routine and indicates that reliable gains could not be calculated.

Most of the time, an alarm or fault indicates a problem with the steam turbine system that is outside of
PID tuning. The descriptions below help identify what in the system may be causing the less than ideal
control conditions. In some cases, suggestions to the Automated PID Optimizer configuration are
included, in order to try to achieve successful automatic tuning.

Alarms
Alarm 1 - Rate group not fast enough
This alarm indicates that the rate group of the block is not fast enough to provide optimum control
for the control loop, as measured. The rate group should be at least 20 times as fast as the
system response.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 The process loop (like speed) controlled by the PID is too fast for the rate group (RG) of
PID
 If the control loop is position droop, the problem may be that there is no lag or other filter
on the between the PID output and the process input.

Woodward 156
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Some solutions for this alarm could be:
 If it is not possible to change the rate group, the second solution would be to accept the
suggested dynamics if adequate, or detune the PID
 If there is no lag or other filter on the between the PID output and the process input for
position droop, the solution would be to add a lag.

Alarm 2 – High overshoot on test step


This alarm indicates that the overshoot on the test step was greater than 50% of the step size.
The performance might be acceptable, depending on the system.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 The valve or turbine response is non-linear. This could occur due to:
 Poppet valve staging, resulting in higher flow with the larger movement of the step, and
lower flow with the earlier smaller movements.
 The actuator or valve response is slew rate limited

If the amount of overshoot is unacceptable, some solutions would be:


 Verify that the poppet valve staging is correct.
 If the poppet valve staging cannot be fixed, the turbine operating point could be adjusted
(i.e. the speed (process) and speed setpoint (SP) could be increased) to tune at the
higher/lower flow point.
 The FAST/SLOW input may need to be reduced, to achieve the desired response.

Alarm 4 – Response to test step sluggish


The test step response did not reach 50% of the setpoint during the test step, the response was
sluggish. The performance might be acceptable, depending on the system demands.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 The valve or turbine response is non-linear. This could occur due to:
 Poppet valve staging, resulting in higher flow with the lower movement of the step, and
higher flow with the earlier smaller movements.
 The actuator or valve response is slew rate limited
 The process or sensor has a long dead time
If the speed or the response is unacceptable, some solutions would be:
 Verify that the poppet valve staging is correct.
 If the poppet valve staging cannot be fixed, the turbine operating point could be adjusted
(i.e. the speed (process) and speed setpoint (SP) could be increased) to tune at the
higher or lower flow point.
 The FAST/SLOW input could be increased, to achieve the desired response.

Alarm 8 - Actuator movement is limited


This alarm indicates that the actuator movement was limited during the Analysis Mode. This can
result in a response that is not optimum, depending on the system conditions.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 The Act Limit input is too low
 The valve or actuator is close to its end of travel, limiting movement or effect.

If the response is not acceptable, some solutions would be:


 If the response is not acceptable, the Act Limit could be increased
 The system operating point could be moved away from the ends of the actuator and
valve travel. This would mean increasing or decreasing the SP input to the block.

Woodward 157
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Alarm 16 – High relative deadtime
This alarm indicates high deadtime in the system, relative to the system bandwidth. Deadtime is
typically measured on a step and is defined as the amount of time between when the SP starts to
move, and when the process starts to move.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 High friction on the valve or actuator
 Lost motion on the valve or actuator or linkage
 Hysteresis in the valve or actuator
 Long lines, such as a pressure transducer or other transducer not located near the
pressure of interest.
 A relatively slow recursion rate in the sensor, control, and/or driver
 Asynchronous I/O in the sensor, control, and/or driver
 Asynchronous communications between the sensor and control or control and driver (if
digital)

Some solutions for this alarm could be:


 With an oscilloscope, Datalog, or logic analyzer, measure the system deadtimes.
 The optimum solution to this problem would be to fix the system and remove the
deadtime. If that is not possible, de-tune the control, to ensure adequate stability.

Alarm 32– Process movement greater than Droop movement during Droop parameter tuning
This alarm indicates that the movement of the process parameter exceeded the movement of the
Droop parameter during droop tuning.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 Improper connections in the GAP. The process (speed) should be connected to the
process input, and the droop parameter (load, scaled in RPM) should be connected to
the Droop input
 The amount of initial actuator movement is set by the system noise. If this is too high, the
machine might move more than the system can support.
 The utility or plant frequency could be moving around.
Some solutions for this alarm could be:
 Ensure that the block is connected correctly.
 Reduce system noise.
 Ensure that the Act Limit field is set correctly.

Alarm 64– Response Timeout too short


This alarm indicates that the movement of the system did not respond enough during the
Response Timeout.

Some causes of this alarm could be:


 The Response Timeout is too short for the turbine system response time

Some solutions for this alarm could be:


 Increase Response Timeout.

Faults
Fault 1 – CLR_STATE was toggled TRUE
This fault will only occur if the CLR_STATE input is toggled TRUE
Some causes of this fault could be:
 The CLR_STATE input was toggled TRUE
o This can occur when system dynamics are changed from Offline to Online

Some solutions for this fault would include:


 Ensure that the CLR_STATE logic is correct; CLR_STATE has priority over automatic
tuning.

Woodward 158
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Fault 2 – Process or droop movement limit low with respect to noise
This fault indicates that the process/droop movement (or noise on the process/droop input) is
greater than 10% of the Process Limit or Droop Limit during the first seconds after the
Automated PID Optimizer routine is enabled. This is usually due to noise or drift on the process or
droop input.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The Response Timeout is too long, the PID cannot increase the output movement fast
enough to counteract system drift.
 The noise or system swing on the process/droop input is greater than 10% of the
Process Limit and/or Droop Limit.
 The system is not at steady state. As an example, if the Integral Gain input is low, there
could be a large error between process and setpoint.
Some solutions would include:
 Decrease Response Timeout if the system is much faster than the time-out time.
 Proportional Gain could be adjusted to make the system stable, if applicable.
 Integral Gain could be adjusted to allow system to minimize error and/or slow hunt, if
applicable.
 The Process Limit or Droop Limit could be increased, if the system allows.
 Check for excessive noise on process or droop signal, check shielding, and grounding on
the applicable sensors and actuator(s).

Fault 3 – High response time variation


This fault indicates that the response variation exceeded the allowable limit. This fault will occur if
the response time variation is greater than a factor of four, tuning would be unrepeatable.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The system has high friction, resulting in initial movements which are lower than later
movement, after the actuator or valve has broken free
 The system has loose linkage or coupling, sometimes the system moves a lot, and
sometimes it does not.
 The hydraulic pressure is moving during the tuning process.
 The steam supply pressure is moving during the tuning process.

Some solutions for this fault would include:


 Monitor the performance of the system, including the valve, steam pressure, hydraulic
pressure, etc.
 Use a Datalog to verify proper I/O to the PID

Fault 4 – Process movement didn’t correlate to actuator movement


This fault indicates that the response did not correlate to the actuator movement.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The hydraulic pressure or steam supply is moving during the tuning process, if the
actuator demand is increasing but the supply is dropping, the actuator could close, or
vice versa.

Some solutions for this fault would include:


 Monitor the performance of the system, including the valve, steam pressure, hydraulic
pressure, etc.
 Use a Datalog to verify proper I/O to the PID

Woodward 159
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Fault 5 – Process movement greater than Process Limit
This fault indicates that the process input exceed the Process Limit.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The Response Timeout is too long, the PID cannot increase the output movement fast
enough to counteract system drift.
 The system is not at steady state. As an example, if the Integral Gain input is relatively
low, there could be a large error between process and setpoint.
 The Process Limit is too low
 The Act Limit is too high; resulting in actuator movements that are too large for the
Process Limit (this is unlikely).

Some solutions for this fault would include:


 Decrease Response Timeout if the system is much faster than the time-out
 Proportional Gain could be adjusted to make the system stable, if applicable.
 Integral Gain could be adjusted to allow system to minimize error and/or slow hunt, if
applicable.
 Process Limit could be increased, if the turbine system allows
 Check for excessive noise on the process input, check shielding and grounding on the
applicable sensors and actuator(s).

Fault 6 – Optimizer time-out


This fault indicated that the optimizer time exceeded the allowable time-out time, of 40 times the
specified Response Timeout, or 20 cycles of movement.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The Act Limit is too low, this is the most common cause of this fault
 The Response Timeout is too short for the process input response.
 The system response is restricted, by low steam pressure, a partially closed trip, and
throttle valve, etc.
 The valve or actuator is against a stop or at the end of its travel, not allowing the PID to
control the process completely.
Some solutions for this fault would include:
 The Act Limit could be increased.
 The Response Timeout could be increased, if the system was still increasing/decreasing
at the time-out times.
 The operating point (Setpoint) could be adjusted, if an actuator or valve is close to the
end of its travel.
 Check the system variables, ensure that inlet pressure is high enough, hydraulic pressure
is high enough, the trip and throttle valve is open, etc.

Fault 7 – Droop input movement, greater than limit.


This fault indicates that the Droop input exceeded its allowable movement, similar to fault 5 for
the process input.

Some causes of this fault could be:


 The Response Timeout is too long, the PID cannot increase the output movement fast
enough to counteract system drift.
 There is noise on the Droop input
 The system is not stable, the Droop input is moving around too much with respect to the
Droop Limit input.
 The system is not at steady state. As an example, if the Integral Gain input is relatively
low, there could be a large error between process+droop and setpoint.
 The Droop Limit is too low.
 The Act Limit is too high; resulting in actuator movements that are too large for the
Droop Limit (this is unlikely).

Woodward 160
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Some solutions for this fault would include:
 Decrease Response Timeout if the system is much faster than the time-out
 Check the Droop input for noise and for the correct level.
 Proportional Gain could be adjusted to make the system stable, if applicable.
 Integral Gain could be adjusted to allow system to minimize error and/or slow hunt, if
applicable.
 Droop Limit could be increased, if system allows.
 Check for excessive noise on Droop input, check shielding and grounding on the
applicable sensors and actuator(s).

Faults 8 through 20 – Input or System status change occurred during the Automatic Tuning routine.
Input conditions and System status are monitored while the optimizer is active to detect changes
that could invalidate the results of the tuning routine.

Fault 16
A copy of the S_D_R input is made when the optimizer is started and is used to detect if the S_D_R input
value crosses 1.0 in either direction. For example, this fault will be annunciated if S_D_R is 0.5 when the
optimizer is started and subsequently S_D_R changes to 1.1 while the optimizer is active. Similarly, this
fault will also be annunciated if S_D_R transitions from greater than 1.0 to less than 1.0 while the
optimizer is active

Woodward 161
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix D
Servlink-to OPC Server (SOS) Tool

SOS Communication Link


The Woodward SOS Servlink OPC server ("SOS") provides an OPC interface for Woodward controls. It
runs on a Windows PC that accesses data on controls using the Woodward proprietary Servlink protocol
through an Ethernet connection. Woodward OPC client applications, such as Monitor GAP and Control
Assistant connect to SOS by selecting a 'Servlink OPC server' connection. SOS implements the OPC
Data Access 2.0 standard, so other OPC client applications may also function with it.

The install for this program is included on the system documentation CD, the latest releases and updates
are always available on the Woodward.com website.

Features of SOS
 Establishes communication link between control and a PC
 Can support redundant Ethernet links to a single control
 Can support links to many controls at the same time
 Can create a .CSV file of all alarm and trip events

Prior to installing SOS, you must install the Microsoft .net framework program which is available on the
Woodward website (www.woodward.com). This will install some operating system library files that are
used by Control Assistant.

Installing SOS
License agreement & Setup

Figure D-1. SOS

Woodward 162
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure D-2. SOS Install Window

Define the desired directory to save

Connecting a PC/Laptop to the Control


You will need to connect to the Peak200 with an RJ45 Ethernet cable. Any Ethernet port can be used,
however it is most convenient to use the same network port that handles all LAN communications (if the
Peak200 is connected to a plant network). You will need to know the IP address of the Ethernet port.
The Default IP for Ethernet 1 = 172.16.100.15 (subnet = 255.255.0.0)

All information in the communication link between the Peak200 and


the PC is done via a Woodward Servlink connection (using the SOS
tool). It is recommended to initially launch this tool independently to
establish a healthy communication link. Once this is done the PC will
cache this information so that future launches will remember Peak200
controls.

Servlink-to-OPC Server (SOS)


The Woodward SOS tool is a sub-component of Control Assistant that handles all of the communications
between one or many Peak200’s on a network and the PC. It can be run independently, which is a useful
way to clearly establish a connection prior to using the Control Assistant or other programs.

To launch SOS on independently:


Under Start / All Programs / Woodward / SOS Servlink OPC Server

Click on SOS Servlink OPC Server


You should see the following dialog box appear –

Figure D-3. SOS Server status dialog box

Woodward 163
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Under Session – scroll down and select New Session and a dialog box similar to the one below will
appear. In the top entry box, enter the IP address of the Peak200.

Figure D-4. SOS – New Session box

If system connected to Ethernet Port 1 of the Peak200, enter the IP address of this port. The Peak200
default is shown below or enter the IP for the plant LAN network.
Then click on the Connect TCP button

Figure D-5. SOS - Enter Peak200 TCP/IP address

The SOS program will locate the control and establish a Woodward Servlink connection between the
control and your PC. This will take a few seconds to establish; the dialog box should now look like this
(with the IP address being equal to what you typed in above).

Figure D-6. SOS – Active Links dialog box

Woodward 164
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix E.
Control Assistant—Software Interface Tool

Features of Control Assistant


Control Assistant is an optional software interface tool design to help experienced users maintain setup
and configuration settings and troubleshoot system problems. It provides a flexible window into the
application software with multiple features for the user.

The install for this program is included on the system documentation CD, the latest releases and updates
are always available on the Woodward.com website.

Features
 Using WinPanel (similar to the previous Watch Window products)
 Receiving Control Tunables (Download/Receive Tunables from Peak200)
 Sending Control Tunables (Upload/Send a Tunable File to the Peak200)
 Trending Control Parameters
Viewing Datalog files

Prior to installing Control Assistant, you must install the Microsoft .net framework program which is
available on the Woodward website (www.woodward.com). This will install some operating system library
files that are used by Control Assistant.

Installing Control Assistant

License Agreement & Setup

Figure E-1. Control Assistant License Agreement

Woodward 165
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure E-2. Control Assistant Install Window

Define the desired directory to save Control Assistant and press ‘Next’. It is preferable to use the default,
as it will keep all Woodward Software in a common folder. If the program folder field is blank, type in
“Woodward” and the install will create a program folder named Woodward.

Figure E-3. Control Assistant Folder Selection

Choose the desired folder in the ‘Start Menu’ to save the shortcuts.

Figure E-4. Control Assistant Install Complete

Woodward 166
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


After Control assistant is installed press ‘Close’. You may or may not have to restart your computer
depending on whether or not you had a previous version installed.

Figure E-5. Install Restart Window

Press ‘Yes’ to restart your computer now, or press ‘No’ to restart your computer later. Control Assistant
will NOT function properly until restarting the PC.

Using Control Assistant


To launch Control Assistant:
Under Start / All Programs / Woodward / Control Assistant 4

Click on Control Assistant 4

Use the Control Assistant HELP in the menu list to get familiar with all
features of this product, or for additional information about using the
features discussed in this chapter.

You should see the following dialog box appear –

Figure E-6. Control Assistant Window

Woodward 167
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Next click on the New Winpanel icon in the toolbar- and the following dialog box will appear.

Figure E-7. Dialog for Servlink OPC connection

Clicking on Connect will open a WinPanel window that will look like the figure below.

Figure E-8. WinPanel Session

Using WinPanel (.ws files)


Control Assistant includes a feature called WinPanel that provides a text listing of all the GAP blocks in
the application. The WinPanel window allows viewing of any software variable in the system, and is
therefore intended to be used by users familiar with the architecture of the control software. WinPanel is a
typical Windows application that provides a powerful and intuitive interface. The menu structures are
familiar to Windows users. Variable navigation is provided through the Explorer window similar to the
Explorer in Windows. This tool will look very familiar to users with experience using Woodward’s Watch
Windows products.

The WinPanel window acts as an OPC client and establishes the data link with SOS. For this reason, the
WinPanel window must be opened and a control selected to enable uploading or downloading the
tunables or trending data from the control (next sections). If multiple controls are available in SOS, they
will all appear in the WinPanel window.

Typical Peak200 users are not familiar with the GAP and therefore it is not expected to normally need to
create new WinPanel views.

What is valuable for a Peak200 user is the ability to Open WinPanel View files that have been created by
Woodward or by commissioning engineers. These files are identified as <filename>.ws files. This is a
handy way to be able to gather system information, support tasks such as valve stroking, tuning or
system checkout.

Woodward 168
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Retrieving Control Tunables (Tunables from Peak200 to a PC)


Tunables can be RETRIEVED from the control at anytime with no affect
on turbine operation.

Once the control is configured and the signals are calibrated, it is recommended that the user save a file
containing this information. This is useful for setting up a spare unit, as a replacement or for initially
configuring other units of the same type.

1. The first step is to follow the above steps up to the point of having a WinPanel open and the correct
control selected
2. Select Transfer/Receive Debug Tunable List from the menus or the Retrieve Icon from the tool bar

(Note the send icon is not available)


The following box should appear

Figure E-9. Control Assistant – Retrieve Tunable Dialog box

3. Click on the Open button and the file will be automatically created with the control ID, time, and date in
the filename and the extension .tc. Save this file.

Sending Control Tunables (Tunables from PC to Peak200)


To send tunable settings to the control the Peak200 must be in the IO
Lock condition, therefore the turbine must be shutdown and the
Peak200 must be in a TRIPPED state. Entering into I/O Lock mode
while the turbine is running will cause an automatic shutdown of the
turbine with resulting process stoppage. Do not enter the I/O Lock to
upload tunables into the control while the turbine is running.

To load a previously created tunable file (.tc) into a Peak200, the turbine must be shut down since the
control will need to enter configuration mode to complete this process. Once the turbine is shutdown, follow
these steps:

1. From within Control Assistant Open the tunable (.tc) file


2. Follow the steps in the previous section up to the point of having a WinPanel open and the correct
control selected

3. From the menu select Control/Lock IO or select the Lock IO icon from the tool bar
4. Once selected a dialog box will appear asking for the Debug password – Enter 1112
5. If the Peak200 TRIPPED LED was ON (Trip is present) a confirmation box will appear that Lock IO
was issued. If the Peak200 TRIPPED LED was OFF (no trips present) then the confirmation box will
state it was not allowed
6. Click on the tunable file and select Transfer/Send Tunable List from the menus or the Send Icon from

the tool bar (Note in this state both retrieve and send are available)
7. The following box should appear

Woodward 169
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure E-10. Control Assistant – Send Tunable Dialog box

8. Click on Store and the control will save these values.


9. Next click back onto the WinPanel window and then select Control/Reset from the menus or the Reset

Icon from the tool bar

10. A dialog confirmation box will appear with some warnings and requires a confirmation check that these
have been consider. There is also an option to Save Values again if desired. Checking the warning
acknowledge box will allow the Reset button to be selected.
11. Selecting Reset will issue a ‘soft’ reset to the control and it will perform a soft reboot – similar to when the
user exits the Configuration mode. The procedure is now complete.

It is highly recommended that the user keep a current tunable list file
available at site. This will make the configuration and setup of a
spare unit very simple and assist in troubleshooting system
problems.
The System Documentation CD contains a file named
“Factory_Default_Tunables_Rev_xx.tc“ that can restore the control
to the original ‘as shipped’ settings, if that is desired load this file.

Trending Control Parameters


Done at any time and will not interfere with any Peak200 control functions.

The first step is to follow the previous steps that were listed up to the point of having a WinPanel open
and the correct control selected

Use File/Open to open a previously saved trend script file (if you have one). To create new trends, the
user will need some understanding of how Woodward’s GAP software is constructed as well as some
specific knowledge of the Peak200 application software. If the user is not familiar with GAP, recommend
limiting use to existing trend script files.

Opening existing Trend Script Files


When you open an existing trend script, the graph will automatically begin trending the control data. The
graph will auto scale or the scale can be adjusted to fixed values by the user. There are 2 vertical curser
lines that the user can slide along the X axis – the Y1 and Y2 values below the graph relate to these
values and the Total Difference (lower right corner) will show the time difference between the 2 cursers
lines at all times.

The control assistant tool bar has Stop/Start/Zoom button and options to save the data buffer of values
into a file for later viewing or analysis. Use the Help menu item to learn more.

Figure E-11 is an example of the Speed Control Trend Script.

Woodward 170
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure E-11. Control Assistant – Speed Control Trend Script

Creating a Trend Script File


Click on the New Trend icon if you want to create a new trend of parameters. A dialog box will
appear and the user will be able to build a trend script file for view system parameters by expanding the
explorer window on the left and ‘drag & drop’ GAP block field parameters into the window on the right.

Figure E-12. Control Assistant – Create Trend Script File

Once the script file is complete, clicking on OK will launch the trend file enabling viewing live control data.
For additional information on the trending capabilities, refer to the Control Assistant Help menu.

Woodward 171
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix F.
AppManager Service Tool

File Management with App. Manager


AppManager is a Windows based remote access tool for Woodward controls. The Peak200 is loaded with
a service that allows it to interface with AppManager. AppManager is used to manage the applications on
the Peak200 and provide access to operating system information.

The install for this program is included on the system documentation CD, the latest releases and updates
are always available on the Woodward.com website.

Features of App. Manager


 Send/Retrieve files from the control
 Retrieve Datalogs from the control
 Change Ethernet Network addresses
 Start/Stop the GAP or WGUI application that is running on the control
 Load Service Packs

Installing App Manager

License agreement & Setup

Figure F-1. App Manager Install Window

Select Next to continue with the installation.

Woodward 172
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure F-2. App Manager License Agreement Window

To install App Manager, select “I accept the terms in the license agreement”. Once this has been
selected, select Next to continue the installation.

Figure F-3. App Manager Installation

Woodward 173
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Choose the desired folder in the ‘Start Menu’ to save the shortcuts.

Figure F-4. App Manager Install Complete

After App Manager is installed press ‘Finish’. You may to restart your computer depending on whether or
not you had a previous version installed.

The topics covered below will highlight the main functions that a Peak200 user may want to do using this
tool. For user already familiar with this tool the only new feature is the ability to access the GUI files. For
complete information on this tool, use the help menu

To launch App Manager:


Under Start / All Programs / Woodward / AppManager

Click on AppManager

You should see the following dialog box appear –

Figure F-5. AppManager Window

AppManager will display three panels; the left side panel will show the Control Name and IP Address for
each control available on the network. The right-side panels will not show information until you are logged
into a specific control. When that is done, the right upper panel will show the list of applications available
and the right bottom panel will show control status information.

Next click on the “Control Name” of the Peak200 you want to connect. The following dialog box will
appear.

Woodward 174
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure F-6. Dialog for App Manager Connection

To connect to the control, use the following


Connect As: ServiceUser
Password: ServiceUser@1

Click OK and the window should look something like this.

Figure F-7. App Manager Connected to a Control

Woodward 175
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Control Information Parameters


From the main screen – click on the Control Name and then from the Control menu pull-down select
Control Information. The figure below shows an example of the all the information available here. This is a
useful place to obtain embedded software part numbers, memory usage, Ethernet IP assignments, and
total hardware run hours (power up time).

Figure F-8. AppManager Control Info Window

Switching Application Panel Views


The application panel has two views - the control application panel has a white background while the GUI

application window has a maroon background. To toggle between the panels, use the swap
button on the far right side (the second button down from the top).

Figure F-9. AppManager Control (GAP) Application Panel

Woodward 176
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure F-10. AppManager GUI Application Panel

Retrieving Files
The most common use of AppManager is to retrieve data files from the control, specifically Data log and
Trend log files. Do this by using the menus and selecting Control/Retrieve Files. A dialog box will open
and show the files that are available in that application directory.

All Data and Trend log files are in the control application folder.

Figure F-11. Retrieving Files

Transferring Files
For most users there will not be any need to transfer new files to the Peak200, but if this need arises,
AppManager is the tool for doing this. To transfer files to the control, first be sure you are in the correct
application window. For example, to transfer a customized or updated GUI file – switch to the GUI
application file panel before transferring the new file.

Use the menu and select Control/Transfer Application Files. A dialog box will open so that you can
browse your PC to fine the correct file needed to be transferred.

The control will allow any file to be transferred unless it says an existing file on the control with the same
name. If this occurs the user must first delete the file on the control before the new one can be
transferred. Woodward typically adds a revision or a build number to the end of the file name so that any
updates can be added to the control and the previous revisions will still be available. All user tunable
settings are associated with a specific program revision.

Woodward 177
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Changing the Ethernet IP addresses


Recommend the user configure the IP addresses and through the GUI in configuration mode at the same
time, the control is setup. It is possible to set them up with AppManager – but the control applications
must be stopped first. It is best to only have experienced users do this via AppManager. In either method,
the turbine must be shutdown to change the IP addresses.

Start/Stop Applications
AppManager is the tool that is used to Start or Stop the execution of the GAP (control and IO) program
and/or the GUI (display) program. The GAP and the GUI are handled very differently and will be
explained below.

GAP applications – Control logic and I/O


The GAP program (filename.out) has logic checks to ensure that it is never stopped while the turbine is in
operation. Stopping the GAP program puts the control in IOLOCK. There is typically no need for the user
to stop the GAP program unless loading an OS service pack or the unit is being updated to a newer GAP
revision.

GUI applications – Display Graphics


The GUI program (filename.wgui) contains all the pages of information that appear on the front screen. It
can be stopped and restarted without any interruption of the turbine operation (does not affect the GAP
execution).

The typical use of stopping and restarting the GUI program is:
1. Change the program (to a different build revision)
2. Change the default language of the screen

To change the language, go to the MODE screen and navigate to the Globe Icon and press Enter. A list
of language options will appear – after selecting the desired language the GUI must be restarted. If the
turbine is shutdown, you could just power cycle the control. If the turbine is in operation – or it is not
desired to stop the GAP application, then the GUI can be selected, stopped, and started from the screen
shown in Figure F-10.

Install a Woodward Service Pack


Use the AppManager tool to install a service pack to update the OS or the real-time process that
executes the GUI application.

Woodward representatives or a service bulletin directing the user through the process typically does this.
Nominally, these are the steps:
1. Shutdown the turbine to a complete stop
2. Stop the GAP and GUI applications that are running
3. Under the Control menu click on Install Service Pack
4. Locate and launch the Woodward service pack (may take minutes)
5. At the end there will be a dialog box asking to Reset the control click yes
6. After the control reboots – log into the control again
7. Start the GAP and GUI applications

Woodward 178
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix G.
Using Peak200 Internal Simulation Mode

The Peak200 has an available speed simulation mode that is intended to be used to verify the control
configuration and as a training tool. Any unit (a spare unit is ideal) can be setup in an office, lab, or
conference room to use this feature and allow the user to configure and simulate some functions of the
Peak200 prior to using the unit or wiring it to the turbine. This can be extremely valuable and is used to:
 Test the operation of the configured start routine
 Explore all the options available on the product
 Train and document startup procedures
 Learn how to connect and use the service tools

To enter this mode:


Give the control an external Trip command by making the DI03 External Trip discrete input FALSE.
(This gives a TRIP command to the Peak200).
Then go to the MODE screen and log in as User Level = Configure

This will make two buttons available and an LED which will Enable and Disable the H/W simulation mode.

Figure G-1. HW Simulation Mode Access

When entering this mode, the following actions will take place:
1. The DI03 External Trip will be inverted (so that a FALSE = OK, in normal operation this must be
TRUE= to run the turbine) – Thus a ‘Reset’ will now clear this Trip condition.
2. Actuator fault trips will be overridden
3. Event 009 Alarm will be active stating “Internal HW Simulation is Enabled”
4. A simulated speed ramp will produce speed based upon the valve demand increasing

When any of these actions take place, the H/W Simulation mode will abort
1. If DI channel 3 goes TRUE (Normal run mode must be True to Run)
2. If Speed is ever seen on either of the MPU input channels
3. Exiting Configuration Mode (Peak200 resets user level to Operator – so re-enter Sim mode after
any configuration changes are made)

Typical use would be:


1. Configure the unit for the required steam turbine start routine
2. Configure any start sequence items and/or a critical speed range
3. Configure the ramp rates at rate times as a fraction of what you want (for example for a 4 hour
idle delay use 0.24 minutes instead of 240 min)
4. Exit the configuration mode and re-login as Configure User
5. Simulate a start
Woodward 179
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

DEMO MODE -
Once entering a valid configuration and the unit is in H/W simulation mode, there is also a “Demo Mode”
available under the Service/Tutorial menus.

To place the unit in Demo mode:


1. Press the TRIP button and then Press the ‘Reset’ button and clear all TRIP conditions
2. From the HOME screen verify a ‘Ready to Start’ message appears in the Control Status in the
upper right corner of screen
3. Press HOME/Service/Tutorial and press the “DEMO Mode On” key – this will do the following –
The unit will cycle through the following sequence –
Start
Complete the programmed Start Sequence to Rated
Ramp the Speed Setpoint to Maximum Governor Speed
Issue a Trip
Reset the Trip and repeat the sequence
While in this mode, the unit will automatically switch to five different screens during this routine. The
length of the demo cycle will mostly depend on the Ramp rates setup for the start sequence and the Fast
Rate Offline rate (found under Service/Speed Control).

Any time the DEMO mode is active screens will automatically switch showing a small sample of features
and pages without need for operator/user commands. You can navigate to other pages while in this
mode, however when the sequence calls for a page switch it will jump back into its automated page
sequence. DEMO mode is the only time the screen will ever switch automatically.

Any time the Demo mode is disabled, press the TRIP button to clear all sequence steps prior to re-
enabling.

The following is a very simple example configuration that works well for the Demo mode

Table G-1. Example Demo Configuration Settings

Configuration Menu

Turbine Start Menu


Start Mode: Automatic Start Screen 1
This selects Start Sequence as: Idle/MinGov Sequence Screen 1
Idle Speed Setpoint (rpm) 1000 Screen 2
MinGov Speed Setpoint (rpm) 3000 Screen 2
Rate to MinGov (rpm/s) 50 Screen 2

Speed Input Channel 1 ->


Max Speed level (rpm) 6000 Screen 1

Speed Setpoints
Overspeed Test limit (rpm) 4800 Screen 1
Overspeed Trip (rpm) 4750 Screen 1
Max Gov Speed (rpm) 4500 Screen 1
Min Gov Speed (rpm) 3000 Screen 1
Underspeed Setpoint (rpm) 2800 Screen 1
Can add a critical speed avoidance range under this menu, if desired

Service Menu

Speed Control Menu


Fast Rate Offline (rpm/sec) 50 Screen 1

Woodward 180
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


When finished simulating with the unit – it is recommended to load either Site tunables or the factory
default tunables into the unit to avoid any problems when the unit is installed (for example, if this unit is to
be a spare on the shelf). To do this, follow the procedure for uploading/downloading tunables using the
Control Assistant tool.

To return to factory default conditions – use this file found on the System Documentation BCD.
Factory_Default_Tunables_Rev_xx.tc

Woodward 181
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix H.
Startup and Commissioning Checklist

The Peak200 is a user-friendly control that is intended to be configurable in the field by a variety of users
with various levels of turbine control experience. Success is ultimately dependent on the knowledge of the
user

The following is a brief list of the minimum checks that should be done prior to attempting to start the
turbine for the first time (initial control commissioning).

Test to be done prior to powering up the control


 Verify that control supply power voltage matches the supply voltage
 Verify if Analog Input signal loops are powered internally or externally (wired correctly)
 Verify if Discrete Input circuits wetting voltage is supplied by control DI power or by external
power (wired correctly)
 Verify that the Configuration worksheet (or optional Excel spreadsheet file) is completed

Tests to Be Done Prior to Running the Turbine


Verify Speed Signals verify number of teeth/gear ratio
Loop Check all AI signals verify ranges
Check all DI signals verify active state
Loop Check all AO signals verify ranges / force test
Check all Relay Outputs verify active state / force test
Loop Check all ACT signals perform manual stroke test
Verify Comm links Modbus
Verify TRIP and External DI TRIP from customer Verify with customer
Verify w/ Frequency input that Peak 200 reads the
correct speed Freq * Num Teeth * Gear Ratio /60 = Speed
Verify an External Overspeed Trip Device is in
place and functions properly Verify with customer
Verify that configuration on Peak 200 Front display Verify with customer, start routine, I/O signals,
matches info from Program Worksheets ranges and optional functions

Woodward 182
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Tests to be done while the Turbine is running


Start the Turbine & Verify that the customer’s
expectations of the start routine
Verify in SERVICE/Speed Control the speed Determines when unit switches between settings –
switch setting for changing to ONLINE dynamics is if only single settings needed raise this speed
correct switch value above OSPD trip value
Validate performance at Idle Speed - Tune Use Control Assistant trend script file -
OFFLINE dynamics (if required) Speed_PID.ts. Save settings when completed
Perform an OPTI PID analysis at Idle Speed & Optional test - If Datalog is available, capture this
capture Datalog event
Verify stable operation through the start routine up
to MinGov speed Check critical speed avoidance range if used
Validate performance at Rated Speed - Tune Use Control Assistant trend script file -
ONLINE dynamics if required Speed_PID.ts. Save settings when completed
Perform an OPTI PID analysis at MinGov Speed & Optional test - If Datalog is available, capture this
capture Datalog event
Verification of any configurable control mode
options that are used (CASC, …..) Verify operation and tune as required
Verify use of the Manual Valve demand (Service) if
configured for use
Verify the typical TRIP/Stop routine used by the
site Save settings when all tests completed
Verify an overspeed trip test (internal or external)
full or reduced speed tests available Verify settings with customer
Update customer configuration and service Name the tunable file with an appropriate name
settings worksheets and download the final (like the control ID, date, site unit name,
tunable settings file for archival commissioner’s initials….like
FLEX00051578 2016-12-06_Unit308G_sdo.tc

Woodward 183
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Appendix I.
Feature Pack (FP) S/W add-ons for Peak200

The Peak200 has some optional software features that can be added to the base product offering. These
are called “Feature Packs” and are fully tested by Woodward and are available from Woodward or your
authorized Woodward service provider.

There are two steps to enabling these features.


1. Verify the application software part numbers in your control and compare them with the s/w required
revisions listed with the feature pack. If you do not have the minimum required revision, you will need
to obtain that upgrade package and install it first. The turbine will need to be in a shutdown state to
perform this application software upgrade.
2. Purchase the feature pack license and enter the supplied ‘Site Key’ to enable the features.

Updating the application software

The turbine must be shut down to perform the following procedure. If


it is not, the AppManager program will not allow the application to be
stopped, which will prevent the procedure from being performed.

Use the follow procedure to update the GAP or GUI applications to a newer Revision:
1. If unit has been configured: Download the current tunable settings file from the control. If unfamiliar
with using Control Assistant, refer to Appendix E for step-by-step instructions on “Retrieving Control
Tunables” from the unit.
2. If unfamiliar with using AppManager, refer to Appendix F for step-by-step instructions.
3. In the Control application view panel, Stop the application by selecting Control/Stop Application or
the Maroon Square button on the right-side Toolbar. The IOLOCK LED will come on.
4. Switch to the GUI application view panel (brown background) and Stop the application by selecting
Control/Stop Application or the Maroon Square button on the right-side Toolbar. The status of this
application will now say Stopped.
5. The display on the control will switch to the “splash screen” when no GUI is running.
6. Switch back to the Control application view panel.
7. Under Control menu, select Transfer Application Files.
8. In the dialog box that opens browse to find the new GAP executable file (on your PC) named:
5418-7275_x.out.
9. When transfer is complete, select the file, and start the application by selecting Control/Start
Application or the Blue Triangle button on the right-side Toolbar.
10. Switch to the GUI application view panel (brown background) by using the Swap button on the right-
side Toolbar (or Control/Show GUI Applications View)
11. Under Control menu, select Transfer GUI applications.
12. In the dialog box that opens browse to find the new GUI file (on our PC) named:
5418-7345_x_build01.wgui.
13. When transfer is complete (takes about a minute), select the file, and start the application by
selecting Control/Start Application or the Blue Triangle button on the right-side Toolbar, the GUI
initialization will take about two minutes.
14. If unit was configured: Upload the current tunable settings file (from step 1) from your PC into the
control. Refer to Appendix E, “Sending Control Tunables”.
15. Procedure complete. Both application files are now in AutoStart, and the control will boot up normally
after any power cycle.

Woodward 184
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Activating a Feature Pack


When purchasing the feature pack license, you must supply the serial number of the target control that
will receive the license. The site key supplied with the purchase of the license will be unique to that
control serial number and will only work on that unit. Each control requires its own license, the license will
not transfer from one unit to another (spares would need their own license). Once the “Site Key” is
obtained, follow the steps below to license the control.

Feature Pack 1 in the Peak200:


1. From the HOME screen of the unit (Figure 1) – Go to the Site Info page
2. From the Site Info page (Figure 2) – go to the Site Key page
3. On the Site Key page (Figure 3) – enter the Site Key for enabling the Feature Pack functions. With
the value highlighted (in focus), press Enter to edit the value and then enter the Site Key from the
keypad and press Enter to accept the value. The factory default is 1111.
4. If correctly entered and accepted the Site Key Validated LED will illuminate green.
5. Return to the HOME screen and press the Service button.
6. From this screen, press the Save Settings button to retain the site key entry.
7. All features listed in the table above will now be accessible

Figure I-1. HOME page

Woodward 185
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure I-2: Site Info Page

Figure I-3: Site Key Pop-up page

Contents of Feature Pack 1


(License p/n: 8447-5004 – Release Aug/2017)

Software P/N and Revision Requirements –


(for powered units, this is found on Site Info screen accessible from the HOME page)
GAP AppID 5418-7275_A
WGUI AppID 5418-7345_A

Woodward 186
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Table I-1. Additional Control Features

Where is it Requirement to
Feature Description found? use
Turbine Shutdown
Add I/O - Enables access to a LinkNet I/O section of the Configuration & control in
LinkNet Configuration menu for increasing the available menu – Linknet Configuration
Nodes Input/Output channels in the system Nodes mode
Woodward's datalogging feature allows the
Data user to capture specific parameter values in a
Logging continuous 'running buffer' of memory. User
(10ms can configure the data points and the sample Service menu –
resolution) rate at which the data is gathered. high-speed Datalog None
Enables access to a language translation icon None – GUI needs
on the MODE screen to allow the selection of Mode Screen – to restart, but does
Multi- languages other than English – (initial release Icon in upper not affect turbine
Lingual of FP1 contains Portuguese) right corner operation
Adds an event history feature under the TRIP
or ALARM view page that accesses a Trip or Alarm
Event continuous log of all alarms & events (with time View screen
History & date stamp) captured by the control History button None
Adds an option in the functional menu list for a
discrete input to be used as a start permissive. Turbine Shutdown
When configured for use, the start command Configuration & control in
DI Start will be inhibited until this input is TRUE. Once menu – Contact Configuration
Permissive the unit has started this input will be ignored Inputs mode
Adds an option in the Channel Events for AIs to Can be enabled &
add a setpoint for a Start Permissive. For Configuration disabled in
AI Level example, if the AI is configured as a Monitoring Menu – Analog Service once the
Start signal for Lube Oil Pressure, a setpoint can be Input – Channel AI is configured for
Permissive used as a requirement to start. Events use.
Enabled/Disabled
Adds the option for operators to set the unit to from the Startup
start with a multiplier on the Rate to Minimum, if Curve Page. The
the unit is hot, to allow for a faster startup. This multiplier is set in
needs to be set from the startup curve page Service Menu >
Hot Start after any shutdown. Speed Control None
Turbine Start
Rated Adds option to the Automatic Start to ramp to a Configuration Automatic Start
Setpoint Rated Speed Setpoint instead of Min Governor Menu Used

Woodward 187
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Adding LinkNet Distributed I/O


A navigation button will appear on the Configuration Menu page to allow the user to program additional
I/O for the system.

Figure I-4. Additional Control I/O

Datalogging
The Datalog button under the Service Menu screens will allow the user to access a high-speed data
buffer available in the Peak200.

Figure I-5. Datalog Feature Screens

Woodward 188
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


The Datalog is a fixed configuration which samples and stores data every
10ms (default sample rate) and contains approximately 3 minutes of data per file. The data that is stored
includes all IO channels, controller inputs and output, limiters, and other pertinent information in order to
analyze the system. This Datalog file can also have signals added through a configuration file (created
with Control Assistant).

The Datalog buffer begins collecting data automatically when any of the following occurs:
1. User command from the Datalog page in the Service Menu
2. The turbine is started
3. A file is stored on the drive

The Datalog stops when


1. User command from the Datalog page in the Service Menu
2. A shutdown
A Datalog file automatically prints to the control Hard Drive for retrieval when the Datalog is stopped,
which in turn restarts the Datalog buffer when the file is printed. The control will store three log files on the
control and then begin to overwrite previous Datalog files when generating a new file. The files are
indexed with a value from one to three which increments each time a new file is generated.

Datalog File Retrieval


Datalog files can be retrieved from the Peak200 for analysis using AppManager (see Appendix F). The
name of these files are:
TREND_DLOG1.log
TREND_DLOG2.log
TREND_DLOG3.log
Since the files overwrite to never have more than three, the file time & date information is needed to
determine the most recent file.

Datalog File Analysis


Open Datalog files with Control Assistant (after download onto your PC) from the control using
AppManager. With Control Assistant open, go to File > Open… and navigate to file location on your PC
and select Open. The Graph Properties page will open with the list of available signals in the left window.
Signals plotted (referred to as pens), can be moved from the available signals list to the right window.
Once in the right window, the pen color and order customization is an option:

Figure I-6. Selecting Datalog trend parameters

Woodward 189
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


Generate the graph by selecting OK in the Graph Properties Menu. Once generated, the plot displays in
the top portion of the screen and the pen details are given on the bottom. The Scale (Low) and Scale
(High) are automatically set initially but can also be set manually. Two cursors can be dragged on the
plots in order to see exact values and compare data between two time stamps (Y1 column in the Pen
details is Cursor 1, Y2 column is Cursor 2, and Delta-Y is the change in the signal value between the two
cursors). In the bottom right hand corner of the window, the ‘Time Difference’ is in seconds and is the
amount of time difference between the cursors. Please see the help menu within Control Assistant for
detailed information on all menu options.

Continuous DataLog
The Continuous DataLog feature allows for Datalog files generations, which merge in Control Assistant to
create a plot over very long periods. This mode supports commissioning or troubleshooting efforts. For
that reason, the Continuous Mode will change the Data Sample Rate to 10ms. Use the Continuous Mode
with AppManager to automatically collect the Datalog files as they are generated.

Press the ‘Enable Continuous’ button on the Datalog page in the Service Menu to enable Continuous
Mode. You will need to stop the current collection and re-start the TrendLog to place it into Continuous
collection mode.

Next, in AppManager, go to Automated File Collection > Configure Automated File Collection Task. Select
the control from the ‘Available Control’ list and add it to the ‘Controls to gather files from’ list. Within the
‘Datalog retrieval options’, set the folder on your PC where files will be stored. Press ‘OK’ to exit the
configuration menu.

Note: by default, each file is approximately 3.4 megabytes and generates a file once each collection
time internal (shown on Datalog page – default is 265 sec). This means that approximately 65
megabytes of data will be stored every hour on your PC, when collecting at 10 ms data rates.

After clicking OK you will be prompted if you would like to start collecting now – if yes – it will gather all
current Datalog files on the control. To begin collecting files you can also go to Automated File Collection
> Start Automated File Collection Task. Once started, AppManager will display ‘Monitoring Network for
New Files’ in the bottom window indicating that new files on the control are automatically saved to your
PC.

Figure I-7. AppManager Setup for Automatic Collection of Datalog Files

The Control will remain in Continuous Mode for 8 hours or until it is manually disabled from the Datalog
page.

To View the continuous Datalogs, select all the files (instead of just one) when opening the file and then
follow the same steps as above to construct the graph of the desired variables.

Woodward 190
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines


See the Control Assistant Appendix for more information of how to use this feature.

Typical use would be:


1. Initial commissioning and tuning system dynamics – high speed Datalog for troubleshooting any
issues
2. Automatically capturing this data on any trip, to help analysis/solve any unclear causes
3. Adjust the settings to capture slow speed process data (over hours of operation) to troubleshoot plant
operation data when needed

Multi-Lingual Support
The language selection button appears in the upper right corner of the Mode screen – feature packs may
turn on additional language options than the base Peak200 offers.

Figure I-8. Language Icon on Mode Screen

Consult your sales representative for more information regarding the languages currently available for the
Peak200 product.

Woodward 191
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Event History Access


The control retains a continuous file of all alarm and trip events in a file named ae_eventlog.csv recorded
onto the hard drive. Use the AppManager tool (Retrieve File option) to retrieve the file for analysis at any
time.

The feature pack allows file access and viewing conveniently on the front panel display. It will make
available an Event History page that will be accessible from either the Trip or the Alarm View page.

Figure I-9. Navigation to Event History page

The Event History page shows each alarm and trip event, and any acknowledge or reset commands
entered. This is a raw/unfiltered file so each of these displays with the corresponding time stamp. Use the
Adjust key to scroll up/down the list, if you leave the page and return it will always initialize back at the top
of the list (most recent first).

Notes:
 The Reset and Acknowledge commands will always appear twice as both the Alarm and Trip latch
blocks receive this command
 This is accessing a continuously updating file that is in English only. Translation not available.
 The Event number has been added to the beginning of each event message string and equates to the
Event ID in the manual and the number shown on the current VIEW screens of alarms and trips
 If an external discrete input Trip exists as the unit powers up, a TRIP_01 logs with a time stamp of
0:0:0 1 Jan 1970. This is because the DI Trips are time stamped at 1 ms intervals and the Real time
Clock block does not initialize until the control application has run for 10 ms

Woodward 192
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Start Permissive Discrete Input


An additional option will appear in the Discrete Input (DI) functional menu selection for a Start Permissive
input. When configured for use, any Start command to the control will be inhibited while this input is false.
Once this input is TRUE and the Start command is re-issued then the unit will start. Once the unit has
started, the status of this input (true or false) is ignored and will not affect turbine operation. There is also
an additional relay output menu selection that allows the status of this Start Ready to Start indication
below to drive a relay output.

If all shutdowns are clear, but this input is false the Control Status message (upper right of every screen)
will read “Start Perm Not Met”. If a start command is issued at this time the Start dialog pop-up box will
appear to further annunciate this condition.

Figure I-10: Start Pop-up page with Start Permissive

Figure I-11: Menu selections for DI and Relay Output

Woodward 193
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Start Permissive Analog Input


An additional option will appear in the Channel Events screen for Analog Inputs (AI) and RTD inputs to
configure a setpoint to be used as a start permissive functional menu selection for a Start Permissive
input. When configured for use, any Start command to the control will be inhibited while the signal level is
less than (or greater, if inverted) the setpoint. Once the setpoint condition is met the Start command is re-
issued then the unit will start. Once the unit has started, the status of this input compared to the setpoint
is ignored and will not affect turbine operation.

If all shutdowns are clear, but the condition is not met the Control Status message (upper right of every
screen) will read “Start Perm Not Met”. If a start command is issued at this time the Start dialog pop-up
box will appear to further annunciate this condition.

Figure I-12: Menu selection for Analog Input Start Permissive

Hot Start
An additional option will appear in the Speed Control Service Menu for a Hot Start Multiplier. This
multiplier is applied to the Ramp to Minimum rate when a Hot Start is activated. This allows the turbine to
start at a faster rate when the turbine is determined to be hot. For example, if the Ramp To Minimum rate
is 30 RPM/s, and the Hot Start Multiplier is 2, then the ramp rate will be 60 RPM/s. The Hot Start can be
enabled and disabled from the Startup Curve menu bar. The Hot Start is disabled after any shutdown,
requiring it to be enabled prior to each startup.

Figure I-13: Menu selection for Hot Start Multiplier

Woodward 194
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Figure I-14: Hot Start Enable and Active LED

Rated Setpoint Start


When using an Automatic Start Sequence, an additional option will appear in the Turbine Start menu to
enable a Rated Speed Setpoint. This allows the turbine to ramp to a pre-defined Rated Setpoint between
Minimum and Maximum Governor Speeds. When configured for use, speed control begins at idle speed,
which is a setpoint lower than Minimum Governor Speed. The command to go to Rated can be issued by
closing the IDLE/MIN GOV input, from the front panel, or from the Go To Minimum Governor Modbus
command (0:0006). When the command is issued, the turbine will accelerate to the configured Rated
Speed Setpoint at the Rate to MinGov rate.

Woodward 195
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Revision History

Revision E—
 Added sentence to the 2nd paragraph on pg. 18
 Fixed second equation on pg.18
 New text into Warning box and new content for last paragraph on pg. 71
 Multiple equation fixes and new Gear Ratio content on pg. 72
 New content in last paragraph on pg. 98
 Changed last bullet under Modbus Points of Interest on pg. 116
 Replaced content for Address 1:0005 in Table 6-6

Revision D—
 Added RoHS Directive
 Edited two paragraphs within Special Conditions for Safe Use
 Added Explosion Hazard Warning box
 Inserted new paragraph in Start Mode section of Chapter 3
 Added new content to the Configuration Mode section of Chapter 4
 Edited bullet in Idle/Minimum Ramp section of Chapter 5
 Added new content to the Speed Control Menu in Chapter 7
 Replaced Table I-1 in Appendix I
 Added Start Permissive Analog Input, Hot Start, and Rated Setpoint Start sections to the end of
Appendix I
 Replaced DoC 00109-45-EU-02-02

Revision C—
 Large portions of Appendix I have been revised/added
 Revised Optional Distributed I/O section
 Added three new functions to the Screen/Key Options Menu
 Added new content to the Channel Events Screen and the LinkNet Node section
 Revised content in the LinkNet Nodes Menu section
 Added new content to Appendix A Configuration Mode Worksheets
 Added new content to Appendix B Service Mode Screen/Key options worksheet

Revision B—
 Added INMETRO certification

Revision A—
 Updated ATEX and IECEx certifications
 Updated EU Declaration of Conformity

Woodward 196
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Declarations

Woodward 197
Released

Manual 35051 Peak®200 Digital Control for Steam Turbines

Woodward 198
Released

We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.


Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com

Please reference publication 35051.

ÌB35051è:èE¶¸µº´¸Î

PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA


1041 Woodward Way, Fort Collins CO 80524, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811

Email and Website—www.woodward.com

Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches, as well as authorized distributors and other
authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address / phone / fax / email information for all locations is available on our website.

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy